HP 5550HDN User Manual

hp color LaserJet 5550,  
5550n, 5550dn,  
5550dtn, 5550hdn  
use  
HP Color LaserJet 5550, 5550n, 5550dn,  
5550dtn, 5550hdn  
User Guide  
Copyright and License  
Trademark Credits  
© 2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard  
Development Company, L.P.  
Adobe® and Adobe Postscript® 3™ are  
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation  
without prior written permission is  
prohibited, except as allowed under the  
copyright laws.  
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by its  
proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard  
Company under license.  
Energy Star® and the Energy Star logo®  
are U.S. registered marks of the United  
States Environmental Protection Agency.  
The information contained herein is subject  
to change without notice.  
The only warranties for HP products and  
services are set forth in the express  
warranty statements accompanying such  
products and services. Nothing herein  
should be construed as constituting an  
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable  
for technical or editorial errors or omissions  
contained herein.  
Microsoft® is a U.S. registered trademark  
of the Microsoft Corporation.  
PANTONE®* PANTONE®* Colors  
generated may not match PANTONE®*-  
identified standards. Consult current  
PANTONE®* Publications for accurate  
color. PANTONE® and other  
PANTONE®*, Inc. trademarks are the  
property of PANTONE®*, Inc. ©  
PANTONE®*, Inc., 2000.  
Part number: Q3713-90913  
Edition 1, 9/2004  
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The  
Open Group.  
Windows®, MS Windows®, and Windows  
NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation.  
hp customer care  
Online services  
For 24-hour access to information using a modem or Internet connection:  
World Wide Web URL: for the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printers, updated HP printer  
software, product and support information, and printer drivers in several languages can be  
obtained from http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550. (Sites are in English.)  
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of web-based troubleshooting tools  
for desktop computing and printing products. ISPE helps you quickly identify, diagnose, and  
resolve computing and printing problems. The ISPE tools may be be accessed from  
Telephone support  
HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. When you call, you will be  
connected to a responsive team waiting to help you. For the telephone number for your  
country/region, see the flyer that shipped in the box with the product, or visit  
http://www.hp.com/support/callcenters. Before calling HP, have the following information  
ready: product name and serial number, date of purchase, and description of the problem.  
You can also find support on the Internet at http://www.hp.com. Click the support & drivers  
block.  
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information  
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/clj5550_software for the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer.  
The Web page for the drivers might be in English, but you can download the drivers  
themselves in several languages.  
Call: See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer.  
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies  
In the United States, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies.  
In Canada, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies. In Europe,  
supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/supplies. In Asia-Pacific, supplies can be  
ordered from http://www.hp.com/paper/.  
Accessories can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/go/accessories.  
Call: 1-800-538-8787 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3154 (Canada).  
HP service information  
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers, call 1-800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3867 (Canada).  
For service for your product, call the customer support number for your country/region. See  
the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer.  
HP service agreements  
Call: 1-800-835-4747 (U.S.) or 1-800-268-1221 (Canada).  
Extended Service: 1-800-446-0522  
HP toolbox  
To check the printer status and settings and to view troubleshooting information and online  
documentation, use HP Toolbox. You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly  
connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. You must have performed  
a complete software installation to use the HP Toolbox. See Using the HP Toolbox.  
HP support and information for Macintosh computers  
ENWW  
iii  
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and  
HP subscription service for driver updates.  
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh  
user.  
iv  
ENWW  
Table of contents  
ENWW  
v
vi  
ENWW  
ENWW  
vii  
viii  
ENWW  
ENWW  
ix  
Acoustic emissions1, 2 ..........................................................................................................263  
x
ENWW  
xii  
ENWW  
Printer basics  
This chapter contains information on setting up your printer and becoming familiar with the  
printer features. The following topics are covered:  
ENWW  
1
 
Quick access to printer information  
World Wide Web links  
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, product information, and support may be  
obtained from the following URL:  
Printer drivers may be obtained from the following sites:  
or the local driver website: http://www.dds.com.tw  
To order supplies:  
To order accessories:  
User guide links  
Where to look for more information  
Several references are available for use with this printer. See http://www.hp.com/support/  
Setting up the printer  
Getting Started Guide—Step-by-step instructions for installing and setting up the printer.  
This guide is located on the CD that shipped with the printer.  
2
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
       
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide—Instructions to configure and  
troubleshoot the HP Jetdirect print server. This guide is located on the CD that shipped with  
the printer.  
Accessory and Consumable Installation Guides—Step-by-step instructions, supplied with  
the printer’s optional accessories and consumables, for installing the printer’s accessories  
and consumables.  
Using the printer  
User Guide—Detailed information on using and troubleshooting the printer. Available on the  
CD-ROM that came with the printer.  
Online Help—Information on printer options that are available from within printer drivers. To  
view a Help file, access the online Help through the printer driver.  
ENWW  
Quick access to printer information  
3
HTML (Online) User Guide—Detailed information on using and troubleshooting the printer.  
Available at http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550. Once connected, select Manuals.  
4
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
Printer configurations  
Thank you for purchasing the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer. This printer is available  
in the configurations described below.  
HP Color LaserJet 5550  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 printer is a four-color laser printer that prints up to 28 A4 pages  
per minute (ppm) and up to 27 letter size ppm. Following is a list of printer features. For  
more detailed information about each feature, see Printer features.  
Tray 1 is a multipurpose tray that holds up to 100 sheets of various print media or 20  
envelopes.  
Tray 2 is a 500-sheet paper feeder that supports Letter, Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-Rotated,  
executive, A5 (JIS), B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), 11 x 17, A3, 16K, 8K, Executive (JIS), 8.5 x 13,  
and Legal sizes. This tray can also handle custom media.  
Capability to connect using parallel, network, and Jetlink ports. The printer contains  
three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots, a Jetlink port, a universal serial bus (USB 1.1)  
connection, and a standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284-C compliant).  
160 megabytes (MB) of synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM).  
128MB DDR, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board and an additional  
open dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot.  
HP Color LaserJet 5550n  
ENWW  
Printer configurations  
5
     
The HP Color LaserJet 5550n printer is a four-color laser printer that prints up to 28 A4  
pages per minute (ppm) and up to 27 letter size ppm. Following is a list of printer features.  
For more detailed information about each feature, see Printer features.  
Tray 1 is a multipurpose tray that holds up to 100 sheets of various print media or 20  
envelopes.  
Tray 2 is a 500-sheet paper feeder that supports Letter, Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-Rotated,  
executive, A5 (JIS), B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), 11 x 17, A3 16K, 8K, Executive (JIS), 8.5 x 13,  
and Legal sizes. This tray can also handle custom media.  
Capability to connect using parallel, network, and Jetlink ports. The printer contains  
three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots, a Jetlink port, a universal serial bus (USB 1.1)  
connection, and a standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284-C  
compliant). The printer also contains an HP Jetdirect 620N print server EIO network card.  
160 megabytes (MB) of synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM).  
128MB DDR, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board and an additional  
open dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot.  
HP Color LaserJet 5550dn  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550dn is a four-color laser printer that prints up to 28 A4 pages per  
minute (ppm) and up to 27 letter size ppm. Following is a list of printer features. For more  
detailed information about each feature, see Printer features.  
Tray 1 is a multipurpose tray that holds up to 100 sheets of various print media or 20  
envelopes.  
Tray 2 is a 500-sheet paper feeder that supports Letter, Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-Rotated,  
executive, A5 (JIS), B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), 11 x 17, A3, 16K, 8K, Executive (JIS), 8.5 x 13,  
and Legal sizes. This tray can also handle custom media.  
Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing.  
Capability to connect using parallel, network, and Jetlink ports. The printer contains  
three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots, a Jetlink port, a universal serial bus (USB 1.1)  
connection, and a standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284-C  
compliant). The printer also contains an HP Jetdirect 620N print server EIO network card.  
160 megabytes (MB) of synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM).  
128MB DDR, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board and an additional  
open dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot.  
6
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
 
HP Color LaserJet 5550dtn  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550dtn is a four-color laser printer that prints up to 28 A4 pages per  
minute (ppm) and up to 27 letter size ppm. Following is a list of printer features. For more  
detailed information about each feature, see Printer features.  
Tray 1 is a multipurpose tray that holds up to 100 sheets of various print media or 20  
envelopes.  
Tray 2 is a 500-sheet paper feeder that supports Letter, Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-Rotated,  
executive, A5 (JIS), B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), 11 x 17, A3, 16K, 8K, Executive (JIS), 8.5 x 13,  
and Legal sizes. Tray 3 can hold 500 sheets of Letter, Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-Rotated,  
executive, A5 (JIS), B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), 11 x 17, A3, 16K, 8K, Executive (JIS), 8.5 x 13,  
and Legal sizes. Both trays can handle custom media.  
Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing.  
Capability to connect using parallel, network, and Jetlink ports. The printer contains  
three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots, a Jetlink port, a universal serial bus (USB 1.1)  
connection, and a standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284-C  
compliant). The printer also contains an HP Jetdirect 620N print server EIO network card.  
288 MB of SDRAM: 256 MB DDR, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter  
board and an additional DIMM slot. This printer has two 200-pin small outline dual inline  
memory module (SODIMM) slots that accept 128 or 256 MB RAM each. An optional  
hard-drive is available.  
Printer stand.  
ENWW  
Printer configurations  
7
 
HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn is a four-color laser printer that prints up to 28 A4 pages per  
minute (ppm) and up to 27 letter size ppm. Following is a list of printer features. For more  
detailed information about each feature, see Printer features  
Tray 1 is a multipurpose tray that holds up to 100 sheets of various print media or 20  
envelopes.  
Tray 2 is a 500-sheet paper feeder that supports Letter, Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-Rotated,  
executive, A5 (JIS), B4 (JIS), B5(JIS), 11 x 17, A3, 16K, 8K, Executive (JIS), 8.5 x 13,  
and Legal sizes. This tray can handle custom media.  
Trays 3, 4, and 5 can hold 500 sheets of Letter, Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-Rotated,  
executive, A5 (JIS), B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), 11 x 17, A3, 16K, 8K, Executive (JIS), 8.5 x 13,  
and Legal sizes. These trays can also handle custom media.  
Printer stand.  
Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing.  
Capability to connect using parallel, network, and Jetlink ports. The printer contains  
three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots, a Jetlink port, a universal serial bus (USB 1.1)  
connection, and a standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284-C  
compliant). The printer also contains an HP Jetdirect 620N print server EIO network card.  
288 MB of SDRAM: 256 MB DDR, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter  
board and an additional DIMM slot. This printer has two 200-pin small outline dual inline  
memory module (SODIMM) slots that accept 128 or 256 MB RAM each. Additionally,  
this printer contains a hard-drive.  
8
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
 
If you add Tray 5 to the printer after you purchase the printer, the tray position indicator  
might display the wrong number. To change the number, slide the position indicator switch to  
the number 5.  
Note  
ENWW  
Printer configurations  
9
Printer features  
This printer combines the quality and reliability of Hewlett-Packard printing with the features  
listed below. For more information on printer features, see the Hewlett-Packard website at  
Features  
Performance  
Memory  
Up to 28 pages per minute (ppm) for A4 size paper and up to 27  
ppm for letter size paper.  
Also prints on transparencies and glossy paper. For more  
HP Color LaserJet 5550, HP Color LaserJet 5550n, and HP Color  
LaserJet 5550dn models contain 128 MB SDRAM, 32 MB of  
additional memory on the formatter board, and an additional open  
DIMM slot.  
Memory specification: All HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printers  
use 200-pin SODIMM that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM.  
HP Color LaserJet 5550dtn and HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn  
models contain 288 MB of SDRAM: 256 MB DDR, plus 32 MB of  
additional memory on the formatter board and an additional DIMM  
slot. These printer models contain two 200-pin SODIMM slots that  
accept 128 or 256 MB RAM each.  
Optional hard drive can be added via an EIO slot (included with  
the HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn printer).  
User interface  
Graphic display on control panel.  
Enhanced Help with animated graphics.  
Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies  
(network-connected printers).  
HP Toolbox software to provide printer status and alerts,  
configure printer settings, view documentation and  
troubleshooting information, and print internal printer information  
pages.  
Supported printer  
personalities  
HP PCL 6.  
HP PCL 5c.  
PostScript 3 emulation.  
Automatic language switching.  
Direct PDF support.  
XHTML support.  
Storage features  
Job storage. For more information, see Job storage limit.  
Personal identification number (PIN) printing (for printers with  
hard drives).  
Fonts and forms.  
Fonts  
80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript emulation.  
80 printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType™ format available  
with the software solution.  
Supports forms and fonts on the hard drive using HP Web Jetadmin.  
10  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
   
Features (continued)  
Paper handling  
Prints on paper from 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) up to 306 x 470  
mm (12.3 x 18.5 inches).  
Prints on paper with weights from 60 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 (16 to 53 lb  
bond).  
Prints on a wide range of media types including glossy, labels,  
overhead transparencies, and envelopes.  
Multiple gloss levels.  
A 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 2) that supports paper sizes from  
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches) up to 297 x 432 mm (11.6 x 17  
inches).  
Optional 500-sheet paper feeder that supports paper sizes from  
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches) up to 297 x 432 mm (11.6 x 17  
inches); standard on HP Color LaserJet 5550dtn (Trays 3) and  
HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn (Trays 3, 4, and 5) printers. For more  
Automatic two-sided printing on HP Color LaserJet 5550dn,  
HP Color LaserJet 5550dtn, and HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn  
printers.  
250-sheet face-down output bin.  
Accessories  
Printer hard drive, which provides storage for fonts and macros as  
well as job storage; standard on HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn.  
Small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM).  
Printer stand (recommended for additional optional trays).  
Optional Trays 3, 4, and 5, that support paper sizes from 148 x  
210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches) up to 297 x 432 mm (11.6 x 17 inches);  
standard on HP Color LaserJet 5550dtn (Tray 3) and HP Color  
LaserJet 5550hdn (Trays 3, 4, and 5) printers.  
Connectivity  
Optional enhanced input/output (EIO) network card; standard on  
HP Color LaserJet 5550n, HP Color LaserJet 5550dn, HP Color  
LaserJet 5550dtn, and HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn printers.  
USB 1.1 connection.  
HP Web Jetadmin software.  
Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE -1284-C  
compliant).  
The printer supports an Jetlink connection for paper handling  
input devices.  
Both USB and parallel connections are supported, but cannot be  
used at the same time.  
Supplies  
Supplies status page contains information on toner level, page  
count, and estimated pages remaining.  
No-shake cartridge design.  
Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge  
installation.  
Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities (using embedded  
Web server or printer Status and Alerts).  
ENWW  
Printer features  
11  
 
Walk around  
The following illustrations identify the locations and names of key components of this printer.  
Front view  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
output bin  
printer control panel  
top cover  
Tray 1 (open to use)  
Tray 2 (500 sheets of standard paper)  
Tray 3 (optional; 500 sheets of standard paper)  
Tray 4 (optional; 500 sheets of standard paper)  
Tray 5 (optional; 500 sheets of standard paper)  
access to print cartridges, transfer unit, and fuser  
10 on/off switch  
11 stand  
Back/side view  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
output bin  
on/off switch  
EIO connection  
Jetlink connection  
parallel port  
USB connection  
power connection  
12  
Chapter 1  
ENWW  
   
Printer software  
Included with the printer is a CD-ROM containing the printing system software. The software  
components and printer drivers on this CD-ROM help you use the printer to its fullest  
potential. See the Getting Started Guide for installation instructions.  
For the latest information about the printing system software components, refer to the  
readme file on the Web at http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550. For information about  
installing the printer software, view the Install Notes on the CD-ROM included with the printer.  
Note  
This section summarizes the software included on the CD-ROM. The printing system  
includes software for end users and network administrators operating in the following  
operating environments:  
Microsoft Windows 98, Me  
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server 2003  
Apple Mac OS version 8.6 through 9.2.x, and Apple Mac OS version 10.1 and later  
For a list of the network environments supported by the network administrator software  
components, see Network configuration.  
Note  
Note  
For a list of printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product support information, go  
Software features  
Automatic configuration, Update Now, and Preconfiguration features are available with the  
HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer.  
Driver Autoconfiguration  
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for  
Windows 2000 and Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for  
printer accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories that the Driver  
Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline  
memory modules (DIMMs).  
Update Now  
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 5550 printer since  
installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in  
environments that support bidirectional communication. Click the Update Now button to  
automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.  
The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows NT 4.0,  
Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, or Windows XP clients are connected to  
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP hosts.  
Note  
ENWW  
Printer software  
13  
     
HP Driver Preconfiguration  
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that allows  
HP software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments.  
Using HP Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators can  
preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the  
drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver  
Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550.  
Printer drivers  
Printer drivers allow you to gain access to the printer features and allow the computer to  
communicate with the printer (using a printer language). Check the install notes, readme,  
and late-breaking readme files on the printer CD-ROM for additional software and languages.  
The following printer drivers are included with the printer. The most recent drivers are  
available at http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550. Depending on the configuration of Windows-  
based computers, the installation program for the printer software automatically checks the  
computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers.  
PPD2  
Operating  
system1  
PCL 6  
PCL 5c  
PS  
Windows 98,  
Me  
Windows NT  
4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Windows  
Server 2003  
Macintosh OS  
1 Not all printer features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the context-  
sensitive help in your driver for available features.  
2 PostScript Printer Description files.  
If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software  
installation, download them from http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550. Once connected, select  
Downloads and Drivers to find the driver you wish to download.  
Note  
Note  
You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX® and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or  
by requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. See the support flyer  
that came in the printer box.  
If the printer driver you want is not on the printer CD-ROM or is not listed here, check the  
install notes, readme, and late-breaking readme files to see if the printer driver is supported.  
If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program you are using  
and request a driver for the printer.  
14  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
   
Additional drivers  
The following drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet or  
from HP Customer Care.  
PCL 5c printer drivers for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server 2003.  
OS/2 PCL 5c/6 printer driver.  
OS/2 PS printer driver.  
UNIX model scripts.  
Linux drivers.  
HP OpenVMS drivers.  
The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2. They are not  
available for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, or Japanese.  
Note  
Select the right printer driver for your needs  
Select a printer driver based on the way that you use the printer. Certain printer features are  
available only in the PCL 6 drivers. See the printer driver Help for available features.  
Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of printer features. For general office  
printing, the PCL 6 driver is recommended to provide optimum performance and print  
quality.  
Use the PCL 5c driver if backward compatibility with previous PCL printer drivers or  
older printers is necessary.  
Use the PS driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript-specific programs such as  
Adobe and Corel, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS font DIMM  
support.  
The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.  
Note  
Printer driver Help  
Each printer driver has Help screens that can be activated by using either the Help button,  
the F1 button on the computer keyboard, or a question-mark symbol in the upper right corner  
in the printer driver (depending on the Windows operating system used). These Help  
screens give detailed information about the specific driver. Printer driver Help is separate  
from your program Help.  
Accessing the printer drivers  
Use one of the following methods to access the printer drivers from your computer:  
ENWW  
Printer software  
15  
 
Operating System  
To change settings  
for all immediate  
To change print job  
default settings  
To change  
configuration settings  
print jobs (until the  
application is closed)  
(For example, turn  
on Print on Both  
Sides by default.)  
(For example, add a  
physical option such  
as a tray or enable/  
disable a driver  
feature such as  
Allow Manual  
Duplexing.)  
Windows 98, NT 4.0,  
and ME  
From the File menu in  
the application, click  
Print. Select the  
printer, and then click  
Properties. (The  
steps may vary; this  
procedure is most  
common.)  
Click Start, click  
Settings, and then  
click Printers. Right-  
click the printer icon,  
and choose  
Properties (Windows  
98 and ME) or  
Document Defaults  
(NT 4.0).  
Click Start, click  
Settings, and then  
click Printers. Right-  
click the printer icon,  
and choose  
Properties. Select the  
Configure tab.  
Windows 2000 and XP From the File menu in  
the application, click  
Print. Select the  
Click Start, click  
Settings, and then  
click Printers or  
Click Start, click  
Settings, and then  
click Printers or  
printer, and then click  
Properties or  
Preferences. (The  
Printers and Faxes.  
Right-click the printer  
icon, and choose  
Printers and Faxes.  
Right-click the printer  
icon, and choose  
steps may vary; this  
procedure is most  
Printing Preferences. Properties. Select the  
Device Settings tab.  
common.)  
Macintosh OS 9.1  
On the File menu,  
click Print. Change  
the settings that you  
want on the various  
pop-up menus.  
On the File menu,  
click Print. As you  
change settings on the Printing menu, click  
pop-up menu, click  
Click the desktop  
printer icon. From the  
Change Setup.  
Save Settings.  
Macintosh OS X 10.1  
On the File menu,  
click Print. Change  
settings that you want  
on the various pop-up  
menus.  
On the File menu,  
click Print. Change  
settings that you want  
on the various pop-up  
menus, and then on  
the main pop-up  
Delete the printer and  
reinstall. The driver will  
be auto-configured  
with the new options  
when it is reinstalled.  
(AppleTalk  
menu, click Save  
Custom Setting.  
These settings are  
saved as the Custom  
option. To use the new  
settings, you must  
select the Custom  
option every time you  
open a program and  
print.  
connections only)  
Note  
Configuration settings  
may not be available  
in Classic mode.  
16  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
Operating System  
To change settings  
for all immediate  
To change print job  
default settings  
To change  
configuration settings  
print jobs (until the  
application is closed)  
(For example, turn  
on Print on Both  
Sides by default.)  
(For example, add a  
physical option such  
as a tray or enable/  
disable a driver  
feature such as  
Allow Manual  
Duplexing.)  
Macintosh OS X.2  
On the File menu,  
click Print. Change  
settings that you want  
on the various pop-up  
menus.  
On the File menu,  
Open Print Center.  
(Select the hard drive,  
click Applications,  
click Utilities, then  
double-click Print  
Center.) Click on the  
print queue. On the  
Printers menu, click  
Show Info. Select the  
Installable Options  
menu.  
click Print. Change  
settings that you want  
on the various pop-up  
menus, and then on  
the Presets pop-up  
menu, click Save as  
and enter a name for  
the preset. These  
settings are saved in  
the Presets menu. To  
use the new settings,  
you must select the  
saved preset option  
every time you open a  
program and print.  
Note  
Configuration settings  
may not be available  
in Classic mode.  
Macintosh OS X.3  
On the File menu,  
click Print. Change  
settings that you want  
on the various pop-up  
menus.  
On the File menu,  
Open Printer Setup  
Utility. (Select the  
hard drive, click  
click Print. Change  
settings that you want  
on the various pop-up  
menus, and then on  
the Presets pop-up  
menu, click Save as  
and enter a name for  
the preset. These  
settings are saved in  
the Presets menu. To  
use the new settings,  
you must select the  
saved preset option  
every time you open a  
program and print.  
Applications, click  
Utilities, then double-  
click Printer Setup  
Utility.) Click on the  
print queue. On the  
Printers menu, click  
Show Info. Select the  
Installable Options  
menu.  
Software for Macintosh computers  
The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog  
Extensions (PDEs), and the HP LaserJet Utility for use with Macintosh computers.  
The embedded Web server can be used by Macintosh computers if the printer is connected  
to a network.  
PPDs  
PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript drivers, allow you to gain access to the  
printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation  
program for the PPDs, PDEs, and other software is provided on the CD-ROM. Use the  
appropriate PS driver that comes with the operating system.  
ENWW  
Printer software  
17  
   
HP LaserJet Utility  
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. The  
illustrated screens make selecting printer features easier than ever. Use the HP LaserJet  
Utility to do the following:  
name the printer, assign it to a zone on the network, and download files and fonts.  
configure and set the printer for Internet protocol (IP) printing.  
The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X, but the utility is supported for the  
Classic environment.  
Note  
Installing the printing system software  
The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software.  
The printer comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD-ROM. The  
printing system software on the CD-ROM must be installed to take full advantage of the  
printer features.  
If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive, you can download the printing system  
software from the Internet at http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550.  
Sample model scripts for UNIX® (HP-UX®, Sun Solaris) and Linux networks are available  
for download at http://www.hp.com/support.  
Note  
You can download the latest software free of charge at http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550.  
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections  
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98,  
Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, and Windows XP.  
When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the  
software before connecting the parallel or USB cable. If the parallel or USB cable was  
Either a parallel or USB cable can be used for the direct connection. However, you cannot  
connect parallel and USB cables at the same time. Use an IEEE 1284-compatible cable or a  
standard 2-meter USB cable.  
NT 4.0 does not support USB cable connections.  
Note  
To install the printing system software  
1. Close all software programs that are open or running.  
2. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the welcome screen does not  
open, start it by using the following procedure:  
On the Start menu, click Run.  
Type the following: X:/setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).  
Click OK.  
3. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
4. Click Finish when the installation has completed.  
18  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
   
5. You might need to restart the computer.  
6. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is  
correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme  
files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to  
http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550 for help or more information.  
Installing Windows printing system software for networks  
The software on the printer CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network.  
For network installation on other operating systems, go to http://www.hp.com/support/  
clj5550, or see the Network Installation Guide included with the printer.  
The HP Jetdirect print server that is included with the HP LaserJet 5550n, HP LaserJet  
5550dn printer, or HP LaserJet 5550dtn printer has a 10/100 Base-TX network port. If you  
need an HP Jetdirect print server with another type of network port, see Supplies and  
The installer does not support printer installation or printer object creation on Novell servers.  
It supports only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and a  
printer. To install your printer and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such  
as HP Web Jetadmin or HP Install Network Printer Wizard) or a Novell utility (such as  
NWadmin).  
To install the printing system software  
1. If you are installing the software on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows Server  
2003, or Windows XP, make sure that you have administrator privileges.  
2. Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server is configured correctly for the network by  
printing a configuration page (see Printer information pages). On the second page,  
locate the printer IP address. You might need this address to complete network  
installation. If the printer is using DHCP IP configuration, use the name on the second  
page. Otherwise, if the printer is shut down for an extended period of time, DHCP does  
not guarantee that the same IP address will be issued.  
3. Close all software programs that are open or running.  
4. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the welcome screen does not  
open, start it by using the following procedure:  
On the Start menu, click Run.  
Type the following: X:/setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).  
Click OK.  
5. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
6. Click Finish when installation has completed.  
7. You might need to restart the computer.  
8. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is  
correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and  
readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to  
http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550 for help or more information.  
ENWW  
Printer software  
19  
To set up a Windows computer to use the network printer using  
Windows-sharing  
If the printer is directly connected to a computer using a parallel cable, you can share the  
printer on the network so that other network users can print to it. You can also share a USB  
directly connected printer.  
See your Windows documentation to enable Windows-sharing. After the printer is shared,  
install the printer software on all computers that share the printer.  
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks  
This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing  
system software supports Apple Mac OS version 8.6 through 9.2.x, Apple Mac OS version  
10.1, and later.  
The printing system software includes the following components:  
PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files  
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to  
printer features. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on  
the CD-ROM that came with the printer. Use the Apple LaserWriter 8 printer driver that  
comes with the computer.  
HP LaserJet Utility  
The HP LaserJet Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer  
driver. Use the illustrated screens to select printer features and complete the following  
tasks with the printer:  
Name the printer.  
Assign the printer to a zone on the network.  
Assign an IP to the printer.  
Download files and fonts.  
Configure and set the printer for IP or AppleTalk printing.  
The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X, but the utility is supported for the  
Classic environment.  
Note  
To install printer drivers from Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2  
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.  
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If  
the CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the  
desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/  
<language> folder of the Starter CD-ROM (where <language> is your language  
preference). (For example, the Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the  
English printer software.)  
3. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
4. Open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility located in the {Startup Disk}: Applications: Utilities  
folder.  
5. Double-click Printer (AppleTalk).  
6. Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection, click Change.  
20  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
7. Select the printer, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.  
8. On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.  
The icon on the desktop will appear to be generic. All the print panels will appear in the print  
dialog in an application.  
Note  
To install printer drivers from Mac OS 10.1 and later  
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.  
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If  
the CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the  
desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/  
<language> folder of the Starter CD-ROM (where <language> is your language  
preference). (For example, the Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the  
English printer software.)  
3. Double-click the HP LaserJet Installers folder.  
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
5. Double-click the Installer icon for the desired language.  
6. On your computer hard drive, double-click Applications, Utilities, and then Print Center.  
7. Click Add Printer.  
8. Select the AppleTalk connection type on OS X 10.1 and the Rendezvous connection  
type on OS X 10.2.  
9. Select the printer name.  
10. Click Add Printer.  
11. Close the Print Center by clicking the close button in the upper-left corner.  
Macintosh computers cannot be connected directly to the printer using a parallel port.  
Note  
Note  
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections  
(USB)  
Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections.  
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS 8.6, Mac OS  
9. x, and Mac OS X and later.  
The Apple LaserWriter driver must be installed to use the PPD files. Use the Apple  
LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh computer.  
To install the printing system software  
1. Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the printer and the USB port on the  
computer. Use a standard 2-meter USB cable.  
2. Close all software programs that are open or running.  
3. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer.  
The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the CD-ROM menu does not run  
automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop, and then double-click the  
Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/<language> folder of the Starter CD-  
ROM (where <language> is your language preference).  
ENWW  
Printer software  
21  
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
5. Restart the computer.  
6. For Mac OS 8.6:  
From HD/Applications/Utilities, open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility.  
Double-click Printer (USB).  
Next to USB Printer Selection, click Change.  
Select the printer, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.  
Click on the Desktop Printer Icon that was just created.  
On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.  
For Mac OS 9.x  
From HD/Applications/Utilities, open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility.  
Double-click Printer (USB), and then click OK.  
Next to USB Printer Selection, click Change.  
Select the printer, and then click OK.  
Next to Postscript® Printer Description (PPD) File, click Auto Setup and then  
select Create.  
Save the printer setup.  
Click on the Desktop Printer Icon that was just created.  
On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.  
For Mac OS X  
If OS X and 9x (Classic) are installed on the same computer, the installer will show both the  
Classic and the OS X installation options.  
Note  
From HD/Applications/Utilities/Print Center, start the Print Center.  
If the printer appears in the Printer list, delete the printer.  
Click Add.  
From the drop-down menu on the top, select USB.  
From the printer Model List, select HP.  
Under Model Name, select HP Color Laserjet 5550, and then click Add.  
7. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is  
correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or readme  
files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to  
http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550 for help or more information.  
The icon on the desktop will appear to be generic. All the print panels will appear in the print  
dialog in an application.  
Note  
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected  
If you have already connected a parallel or USB cable to a Windows computer, the New  
Hardware Found Wizard appears when you turn on the computer.  
22  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
 
To allow the Wizard to search the CD and automatically install the printer software  
1. In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search CD-ROM drive.  
2. Click Next.  
3. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
4. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is  
correctly installed.  
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and  
readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to  
http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550 for help or more information.  
Uninstalling the software  
This section explains how to uninstall the printing system software.  
To remove software from Windows operating systems  
Use the Uninstaller in the HP LaserJet 5550/Tools program group to select and remove any  
or all of the Windows HP printing system components.  
1. Click Start and then click Programs.  
2. Click HP LaserJet 5550 and then click Tools.  
3. Click Uninstaller.  
4. Click Next.  
5. Select the HP printing system components you want to uninstall.  
6. Click OK.  
7. Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the uninstallation.  
To remove software from Macintosh operating systems  
Drag the HP LaserJet folder and PPDs to the trash can.  
Software for networks  
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see  
the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM  
included with the printer.  
HP Web Jetadmin  
HP Web Jetadmin allows you to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet  
using a browser. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be  
installed only on a single network administration server. It can be installed and run on Red  
Hat Linux; Suse Linux; Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation; Windows 2000  
Professional, Server, and Advanced Server; and Windows XP with Service Pack 1.  
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host  
systems, visit HP Customer Care Online at http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.  
ENWW  
Printer software  
23  
       
When installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin can be accessed by any client through a  
supported web browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape  
Navigator 7.0).  
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:  
Task-oriented user interface provides configurable views, saving network managers  
significant time.  
Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function viewed or  
used.  
Instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other printer problems  
now route to different people.  
Remote installation and management from anywhere using only a standard Web browser.  
Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network, without manually entering  
each printer into a database.  
Simple integration into enterprise management packages.  
Quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address, color capability, and  
model name.  
Easily organize peripherals into logical groups, with virtual office maps for easy  
navigation.  
Manages and configures multiple printers at once.  
For the latest information about HP Web Jetadmin go to http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.  
UNIX  
The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP-UX and  
Solaris networks. It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at  
Utilities  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer is equipped with several utilities, which make it  
easy to monitor and manage the printer on a network.  
Embedded Web server  
This printer is equipped with an embedded Web server, which allows access to information  
about printer and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which web  
programs may run, much in the same way that an operating system, such as Windows,  
provides an environment for programs to run on your computer. The output from these  
programs can then be displayed by a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or  
Netscape Navigator.  
When a Web server is "embedded", that means it resides on a hardware device (such as a  
printer) or in firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server.  
The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the printer that  
anyone can access with a network-connected computer or a standard Web browser. There  
is no special software to install or configure. For more information about the HP embedded  
Web server, see the Embedded Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-  
ROM included with the printer.  
24  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
     
Features  
The HP embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network card status and  
manage printing functions from your computer. With the HP embedded Web server, you can  
do the following:  
view printer status information  
determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones  
view and change tray configurations  
view and change the printer control panel menu configuration  
view and print internal pages  
receive notification of printer and supplies events  
add or customize links to other Web sites  
select the language in which to display the embedded Web server pages  
view and change network configuration  
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server,  
hp toolbox  
The HP Toolbox is a Windows-only software application that can be used for the following  
tasks:  
check the printer status  
view troubleshooting information  
view online documentation  
print internal printer pages  
receive pop-up status messages  
access the embedded Web server  
You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or  
when it is connected to a network. You must have performed a complete software  
installation before using the HP Toolbox.  
Other components and utilities  
Several software applications are available for Windows and Macintosh OS users, as well as  
for network administrators. These programs are summarized below.  
ENWW  
Printer software  
25  
     
Windows  
Macintosh OS  
Network administrator  
Software installer —  
automates the printing  
system installation  
PostScript Printer  
HP Web Jetadmin — a  
browser-based system  
management tool. See  
webjetadmin for the latest  
HP Web Jetadmin software  
Description files (PPDs) —  
for use with the Apple  
PostScript drivers that  
comes with the Mac OS  
Online Web registration  
HP toolbox  
HP LaserJet Utility  
(available from the  
Internet) — a printer  
management utility for Mac  
OS users  
HP Jetdirect Printer  
Installer for UNIX —  
available for download  
HP toolbox (for Mac OS X  
v10.2 and later)  
26  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
 
Print media specifications  
For optimum results, use conventional 75 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) photocopy paper.  
Verify that the paper is of good quality and is free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles,  
dust, wrinkles, curls, or bent edges.  
To order supplies in the U.S., go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.  
To order supplies worldwide, go to http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html.  
To order accessories, go to http://www.hp.com/go/accessories.  
For additional information about supported media weights and sizes, go to  
Supported paper weights and sizes  
Letter and A4 sizes can be loaded with the long-edge or short-edge leading into the printer.  
Long-edge first is the preferred orientation. Long-edge feed gives greater throughput, and  
lower consumable usage. Short-edge feed is called the rotated orientation, and is identified  
in the trays as LTR-R and A4-R. Short-edge feed can be useful when printing on media with  
special features, such as perforations or windows.  
Tray 1 paper sizes and types  
Tray 1  
Dimensions  
Weight or thickness  
Capacity  
Minimum size (unless  
otherwise noted)  
76 by 127 mm  
(3 by 5 in)  
Maximum size (unless  
otherwise noted)1  
306 by 470 mm  
(12.05 by 18.5 in)  
Nondetectable  
standard sizes: Letter,  
Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-  
Rotated, Legal,  
Executive, A5, A3,  
RA3, 11 x 17, B4(JIS),  
B5(JIS), Double post  
card(JIS), 16K, 8K,  
Executive (JIS), 12 x  
18, 8.5 x 13, A6, JIS-  
B6, Statement, #10  
envelope, DL  
Envelope, C5  
Envelope, B5  
Envelope, Monarch  
Envelope. (Tray 1 has  
no automatically  
detectable standard  
sizes.)  
75 to 89 g/m2  
(20 to 23 lb bond)  
Plain paper  
100 sheets  
(75 g/m2; 20 lb bond)  
60 to 74 g/m2  
Light paper  
100 sheets  
(16 to 19 lb bond)  
ENWW  
Print media specifications  
27  
   
Tray 1 paper sizes and types (continued)  
Tray 1  
Dimensions  
Weight or thickness  
Capacity  
90 to 104 g/m2  
Intermediate paper  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
(24 to 27 lb bond)  
105 to 119 g/m2  
(28 to 31 lb bond)  
Heavy paper  
Extra heavy paper  
Cardstock  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
120 to 164 g/m2  
(32 to 43 lb bond)  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
163 to 200 g/m2  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
(44 to 53 lb bond)  
75 to 105 g/m2  
(20 to 28 lb bond)  
Glossy paper  
Heavy Glossy  
High Gloss Images  
Transparency  
Tough Paper  
Envelopes  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
106 to 120 g/m2  
(29 to 32 lb bond)  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
120 to 120 g/m2  
(32 to 32 lb bond)  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
0.12 to 0.13 mm thick  
(4.7 to 5.5 mils thick)  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
0.10 to 0.13 mm thick  
(4 to 5 mils thick)  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
75 to 105 g/m2  
20 envelopes  
(20 to 28 lb bond)  
Labels  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
1 Paper up to 312 mm wide can be fed through the paper path, but most drivers only support  
306 mm maximum width.  
The following table lists the standard sizes of paper that the printer can automatically detect  
when loaded in Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5. For more information about loading  
standard, non-detectable size paper, see Configuring input trays.  
Note  
Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 paper sizes and types  
Tray 2 and optional  
Trays 3, 4, and 5  
Dimensions  
Weight or thickness  
Capacity  
Automatically  
detectable standard  
sizes: Letter, Letter-  
Rotated, A4, A4-  
Rotated, A3, 11x17,  
Legal, B4 (JIS), B5  
(JIS), A5, Executive  
Nondetectable  
standard sizes: 16K,  
8K, Executive (JIS),  
8.5 x 13  
Minimum Size (unless  
otherwise noted)  
76 by 127 mm  
(3 by 5 in)  
28  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 paper sizes and types (continued)  
Tray 2 and optional  
Trays 3, 4, and 5  
Dimensions  
Weight or thickness  
Capacity  
Maximum size (unless  
otherwise noted)  
297 by 431 mm  
(11.69 by 17 in)  
75 to 89 g/m2  
(20 to 23 lb bond)  
Plain paper  
500 sheets  
(75 g/m2; 20 g/m)  
60 to 74 g/m2  
Light paper  
500 sheets  
(16 to 19 lb bond)  
90 to 104 g/m2  
(24 to 27 lb bond)  
Intermediate paper  
Heavy paper  
Extra heavy paper1  
Glossy paper  
High Gloss Images  
Labels  
Maximum stack  
height: 50 mm (2.0 in)  
105 to 119 g/m2  
(28 to 31 lb bond)  
Maximum stack  
height: 50 mm (2.0 in)  
120 to 163 g/m2  
(32 to 43 lb bond)  
Maximum stack  
height: 50 mm (2.0 in)  
75 to 105 g/m2  
(20 to 28 lb bond)  
200 sheets  
120 to 120 g/m2  
(32 to 32 lb bond)  
Maximum stack  
height: 10 mm (0.4 in)  
Maximum stack  
height: 50 mm (2 in)  
Transparency  
Tough paper  
0.12 to 0.13 mm thick  
(4.7 to 5.5 mils thick)  
100 sheets  
0.10 to 0.13 mm thick  
(4 to 5 mils thick)  
100 sheets  
1 The use of Extra heavy paper from Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 is allowed, but the performance  
cannot be guaranteed due to the wide variation in these papers.  
Automatic two-sided printing (duplexing)1  
Automatic two-sided  
printing  
Dimensions  
Weight or thickness  
Capacity  
60 to 120 g/m2  
(16 to 32 lb bond)  
Standard size paper,  
Letter, Letter-Rotated,  
A4, A4-Rotated, Legal,  
Executive, A3, 11x17,  
B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS)  
1 The printer automatically prints on paper weights up to 163 g/m2. However, automatic two-  
sided printing on weights above the maximum value noted in this table can produce  
unexpected results.  
Manual two-sided (duplex) printing. Any of the supported paper sizes listed for printing  
from Tray 1 can be manually duplexed. See Two-sided (duplex) printing for more information.  
ENWW  
Print media specifications  
29  
30  
Chapter 1 Printer basics  
ENWW  
Control panel  
This chapter contains information on the printer control panel, which provides control of  
printer functions and communicates information about the printer and print jobs. The  
following topics are covered:  
ENWW  
31  
   
Control panel overview  
The control panel provides control of printer functions and communicates information about  
the printer and print jobs. Its display provides graphic information about printer and supplies  
status, making it easy to identify and correct problems.  
Control panel buttons and lights  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MENU button  
STOP button  
READY light  
DATA light  
ATTENTION light  
HELP ( ) button  
BACK/EXIT  
(
) button  
) button  
8
9
DOWN ARROW  
SELECT ( ) button  
(
10 UP ARROW  
11 Display  
(
) button  
The printer communicates via the display and the lights on the lower left side of the control  
panel. The Ready, Data, and Attention lights provide at-a-glance information about the state  
of the printer and alert you to printing problems. The display shows more complete status  
information as well as menus, help information, animations, and error messages.  
Display  
The printer display gives you complete, timely information about the printer and print jobs.  
Graphics illustrate levels of supplies, the locations of paper jams, and job status. Menus give  
access to printer functions and detailed information.  
32  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
       
The top-level screen on the display has three areas: message, prompt, and supplies gauge.  
Printer display  
1
2
3
Message area  
Message area  
Prompt area  
Printer display  
1
2
3
Message area  
Supplies gauge  
Print cartridge colors are indicated from left to right: black, magenta, yellow, and cyan  
The message and prompt areas of the display alert you to the state of the printer and tell you  
how to respond.  
The supplies gauge shows the consumption levels of print cartridges (black, magenta,  
yellow, cyan). A ? appears instead of the consumption level when the level is not known.  
This can occur in the following circumstances:  
missing cartridges  
incorrectly placed cartridges  
cartridges with an error  
some non-HP cartridges  
The supplies gauge appears whenever the printer shows the Ready state with no warnings.  
It will also appear when the printer shows a warning or error message concerning a print  
cartridge or multiple supplies.  
Accessing the control panel from a computer  
You can also access the printer control panel from a computer by using the setting page of  
the embedded Web server.  
The computer shows the same information that the control panel shows. From your  
computer, you can also perform control panel functions such as checking supplies status,  
viewing messages, or changing tray configuration. For more information, see Using the  
ENWW  
Control panel overview  
33  
 
Control panel buttons  
Use the buttons on the control panel to perform printer functions and to navigate and  
respond to menus and messages in the display.  
Button name  
Function  
SELECT  
Makes selections and resumes printing after  
recovery errors.  
UP ARROW  
Navigates menus and text, and increases or  
decreases the values of numerical items in the  
display.  
DOWN ARROW  
Navigates backward in nested menus, or quits  
menus or help.  
BACK/EXIT ARROW  
MENU  
STOP  
Accesses and exits the menus.  
Pauses the current job and provides options to  
resume printing or to cancel the current job.  
Provides animated graphics and detailed  
information on printer messages or menus.  
HELP  
34  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Interpreting control panel indicator lights  
Control panel indicator lights  
1
2
3
READY  
DATA  
ATTENTION  
Indicator  
On  
Off  
Flashing  
READY  
Printer is online (able  
to accept and process  
data).  
Printer is offline or is  
turned off.  
Printer is attempting to  
stop printing and go  
offline.  
(green)  
DATA  
Processed data is  
present in the printer,  
but more data is  
needed to complete  
the job.  
Printer is not  
processing or  
receiving data.  
Printer is processing  
and receiving data.  
(green)  
ATTENTION  
A critical error has  
occurred. Printer  
requires attention.  
No conditions exist  
that require attention.  
An error has occurred.  
Printer requires  
attention.  
(amber)  
ENWW  
Interpreting control panel indicator lights  
35  
   
Control panel menus  
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the printer driver or  
software application. This is the most convenient way to control the printer, and will override  
the printer control panel settings. See the help files associated with the software, or for more  
information on accessing the printer driver, see Printer software.  
You can also control the printer by changing settings in the printer control panel. Use the  
control panel to access printer features not supported by the printer driver or software  
application. Use the control panel to configure trays for paper size and type.  
Getting started basics  
Enter the menus and activate any selection by pressing the ( ) button.  
Use the Up or Down arrows to navigate through the menus. In addition to menu  
navigation, the Up and Down arrows (  
) can increase and decrease numerical value  
selections. Hold down the Up or Down arrows to scroll faster.  
The Back button ( ) allows you to move back in menu selections as well as select  
numerical values when configuring the printer.  
Exit all menus by pressing MENU.  
If no key is pressed for 30 seconds, the printer will return to the Ready state.  
A lock symbol next to a menu item means a PIN number is needed to use that item.  
Typically, this number is obtained from your network administrator.  
36  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
       
Menu hierarchy  
The following tables list the menu hierarchies of each menu.  
To access the menus  
1. Press MENU once to access MENUS.  
2. Press or to navigate the listings.  
3. Press to select the appropriate option.  
4.  
Press  
to return to the previous level.  
5. Press MENU to exit the menus.  
MENUS  
RETRIEVE JOB  
INFORMATION  
PAPER HANDLING  
CONFIGURE DEVICE  
DIAGNOSTICS  
SERVICE  
Retrieve job menu (for printers with a hard drive)  
RETRIEVE JOB  
A list of stored jobs appears  
NO STORED JOBS  
Information menu  
See Information menu for more information.  
ENWW  
Menu hierarchy  
37  
         
INFORMATION  
PRINT MENU MAP  
PRINT CONFIGURATION  
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE  
SUPPLIES STATUS  
PRINT USAGE PAGE  
PRINT DEMO  
PRINT RGB SAMPLES  
PRINT CMYK SAMPLES  
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY  
PRINT PCL FONT LIST  
PRINT PS FONT LIST  
Paper handling menu  
See Paper handling menu for more information.  
PAPER HANDLING  
TRAY 1 SIZE  
TRAY 1 TYPE  
TRAY <N> SIZE  
N = 2, 3, 4, or 5  
TRAY <N> TYPE  
N = 2, 3, 4, or 5  
Configure device menu  
more information.  
CONFIGURE DEVICE  
PRINTING  
COPIES  
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE  
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER  
SIZE  
DUPLEX  
DUPLEX BINDING  
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER  
MANUAL FEED  
COURIER FONT  
WIDE A4  
PRINT PS ERRORS  
PCL  
38  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
PRINT QUALITY  
ADJUST COLOR  
SET REGISTRATION  
PRINT MODES  
OPTIMIZE  
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW  
FULL CALIBRATE NOW  
COLOR RET  
SYSTEM SETUP  
JOB STORAGE LIMIT  
(for printers with a hard drive)  
JOB HELD TIMEOUT  
(for printers with a hard drive)  
SHOW ADDRESS  
COLOR/BLACK MIX  
TRAY BEHAVIOR  
POWERSAVE TIME  
PERSONALITY  
CLEARABLE WARNINGS  
AUTO CONTINUE  
SUPPLIES LOW  
COLOR SUPPLY OUT  
JAM RECOVERY  
RAM DISK  
LANGUAGE  
I/O  
I/O TIMEOUT  
PARALLEL INPUT  
EIO X  
(Where X=1, 2, or 3.)  
RESETS  
RESTORE FACTORY  
SETTINGS  
POWERSAVE  
RESET SUPPLIES  
Diagnostics menu  
See Diagnostics menu for more information.  
ENWW  
Menu hierarchy  
39  
 
DIAGNOSTICS  
PRINT EVENT LOG  
SHOW EVENT LOG  
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING  
DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK  
PAPER PATH SENSORS  
PAPER PATH TEST  
MANUAL SENSOR TEST  
COMPONENT TEST  
PRINT/STOP TEST  
40  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Retrieve job menu (for printers with a hard drive)  
The retrieve job menu allows you to view listings of all stored jobs.  
Menu item  
Description  
A list of stored jobs appears.  
NO STORED JOBS  
Scroll through the list to find a specific stored job.  
If there are no stored jobs, this message  
appears in place of the list.  
ENWW  
Retrieve job menu (for printers with a hard drive)  
41  
   
Information menu  
Use the information menu to access and print specific printer information.  
Menu item  
Description  
Prints the control panel menu map, which shows  
the layout and current settings of the control  
panel menu items. See Printer information pages.  
PRINT MENU MAP  
PRINT CONFIGURATION  
Prints the printer configuration page.  
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE  
Prints the estimated remaining life for the  
supplies; reports statistics on total number of  
pages and jobs processed, print cartridge  
manufacture date, serial number, page counts,  
and maintenance information.  
Displays the supplies status in a scrollable list.  
SUPPLIES STATUS  
PRINT USAGE PAGE  
Prints a count of all media sizes that have  
passed through the printer; lists whether they  
were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color;  
and reports the page count.  
PRINT DEMO  
Prints a demonstration page.  
PRINT RGB SAMPLES  
Prints color samples for different RGB values.  
The samples act as a guide for color matching  
on the HP Color LaserJet 5550.  
PRINT CMYK SAMPLES  
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY  
Prints color samples for different CMYK values.  
The samples act as a guide for color matching  
on the HP Color LaserJet 5550.  
Prints the name and directory of files stored in  
the printer on an optional hard drive.  
PRINT PCL FONT LIST  
PRINT PS FONT LIST  
Prints the available PCL fonts.  
Prints the available PS (emulated PostScript)  
fonts.  
42  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
         
Paper handling menu  
The paper handling menu allows you to configure input trays by size and type. It is important  
to correctly configure the trays with this menu before you print for the first time.  
If you have used previous HP Color LaserJet printers, you might be accustomed to  
configuring Tray 1 to first mode or cassette mode. To mimic the settings for first mode,  
configure Tray 1 for size = ANY SIZE and type = ANY TYPE. To mimic the settings for  
cassette mode, set either the size or type for Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY.  
Note  
Value  
Description  
Menu item  
TRAY 1 SIZE  
A list of available sizes appears. Allows you to configure the  
media size for Tray 1. The  
default is ANY SIZE. See  
sizes for a complete list of  
available sizes.  
TRAY 1 TYPE  
A list of available types appears. Allows you to configure the  
media type for Tray 1. The  
default is ANY TYPE. See  
sizes for a complete list of  
available types.  
TRAY <N> SIZE  
A list of available sizes appears. Allows you to configure the  
media size for Trays 2, 3, 4,  
N = 2, 3, 4, or 5  
and 5. The default setting is the  
size detected by the guides in  
the tray. To use a custom size,  
move the switch in the tray to  
custom. See Supported paper  
complete list of available sizes.  
TRAY <N> TYPE  
A list of available types appears. Allows you to configure the  
media type for Trays 2, 3, 4,  
N = 2, 3, 4, or 5  
and 5. The default is PLAIN.  
and sizes for a complete list of  
available types.  
ENWW  
Paper handling menu  
43  
       
Configure device menu  
The configure device menu allows you to change or reset the default print settings, adjust  
the print quality, and change the system configuration and I/O options.  
Printing menu  
These settings affect only jobs without identified properties. Most jobs identify all of the  
properties and override the values set from this menu. This menu can also be used to set  
default paper size and type.  
Menu item  
COPIES  
Values  
Description  
1 - 32000  
Allows you to set the default  
number of copies.  
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE  
A list of available sizes appears. Allows you to set the default  
paper size.  
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER  
SIZE  
UNIT OF MEASURE  
X DIMENSION  
Allows you to set the default  
size for any job without  
dimensions.  
Y DIMENSION  
DUPLEX  
OFF  
ON  
Allows you to enable or disable  
the duplex function on models  
with duplexing capability.  
DUPLEX BINDING  
LONG EDGE  
This item appears only if the  
printer has a duplex unit and if  
DUPLEX is set to ON. It allows  
you to choose the edge of the  
paper to use for binding duplex  
jobs.  
SHORT EDGE  
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER  
NO  
Allows you to set the printer to  
print an A4 job on letter-size  
paper when no A4 paper is  
loaded, a letter-size job when  
no A4-size paper is loaded, an  
A3 job on 11 x 17-size paper  
when no A3 paper is loaded,  
and a 11 x 17-size job on A3  
paper when no 11 x 17-size  
paper is loaded.  
YES  
MANUAL FEED  
COURIER FONT  
WIDE A4  
ON  
Allows you to manually feed  
paper.  
OFF  
REGULAR  
DARK  
Allows you to select a version  
of the Courier font.  
NO  
Allows you to change the  
printable area of A4 paper so  
that eighty 10-pitch characters  
may be printed on a single line.  
YES  
44  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
     
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
PRINT PS ERRORS  
OFF  
ON  
Allows you to select to print PS  
error pages.  
PRINT PDF ERRORS  
PCL  
OFF  
ON  
Allows you to select to print  
PDF error pages. The default is  
OFF.  
FORM LENGTH  
ORIENTATION  
Submenu that allows access to  
PCL menu items.  
FONT SOURCE  
FONT NUMBER  
FONT PITCH  
FONT POINT SIZE  
SYMBOL SET  
APPEND CR TO LF  
SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES  
Print quality menu  
This menu allows you to adjust all aspects of print quality, including calibration, registration,  
and color half tone settings.  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
ADJUST COLOR  
HIGHLIGHTS  
MIDTONES  
SHADOWS  
Allows you to modify the half  
tone settings for each color.  
The default for each color is 0.  
RESTORE FACTORY  
SETTINGS  
SET REGISTRATION  
PRINT TEST PAGE  
SOURCE  
*<N>  
Allows simplex and duplex  
image alignment. The default  
for the SOURCE is TRAY 2.  
The default for the sub-items  
TRAY <N> TYPE, TRAY 1  
TYPE, TRAY 2 TYPE, TRAY 3  
TYPE, and TRAY 4 TYPE is 0.  
TRAY 1  
TRAY 2  
TRAY 3  
TRAY 4  
PRINT MODES  
A list of available modes  
appears.  
Allows you to associate each  
media type with a specific print  
mode.  
ENWW  
Configure device menu  
45  
   
Menu item  
OPTIMIZE  
Values  
Description  
BACKGROUND  
TRANSFER  
Please leave the default  
settings, unless instructed by  
the Call Center.  
TRANSPARENCY  
FUSER WARM UP  
MEDIA TYPE  
RESTORE OPTIMIZE  
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW  
Performs partial printer  
calibrations.  
For more information, see  
FULL CALIBRATE NOW  
COLOR RET  
Performs all printer calibrations.  
For more information, see  
OFF  
ON  
The COLOR RET menu item  
allows the user to either turn on  
or turn off a color printer’s REt  
(Resolution Enhancement  
Technology) setting. The  
default is ON.  
System setup menu  
The system setup menu allows you to make changes to general printer configuration default  
settings such as PowerSave Time, printer personality (language), and jam recovery. See  
Menu item  
Values  
1-100  
Description  
JOB STORAGE LIMIT  
Sets the limit for the maximum  
number of jobs stored on the  
hard drive at the printer.  
See Job storage limit for more  
information.  
JOB HELD TIMEOUT  
OFF  
Sets the period of time that the  
system keeps files in job  
storage before deleting them  
from the queue (for printers  
with a hard drive).  
1 HOUR  
4 HOURS  
1 DAY  
See Job held timeout for more  
information.  
1 WEEK  
46  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
SHOW ADDRESS  
AUTO  
OFF  
This item determines whether  
the printer’s IP address is  
shown on the display with the  
Ready message. If more than  
one EIO card is installed, the IP  
address of the card in the first  
slot is shown. The default is OFF.  
COLOR/BLACK MIX  
AUTO  
AUTO will reset the printer to  
the factory default setting.  
MOSTLY COLOR PAGES  
MOSTLY BLACK PAGES  
MOSTLY COLOR PAGES will  
exhibit the NEVER SWITCH  
behavior to maximize  
performance.  
MOSTLY BLACK PAGES will  
exhibit the LOOK AHEAD  
FIRST behavior to improve  
cost per page as possible while  
minimizing impact to  
performance.  
TRAY BEHAVIOR  
USE REQUESTED TRAY  
MANUAL FEED PROMPT  
PS DEFER MEDIA  
Submenu that allows access to  
tray behavior options. (This  
setting allows you to configure  
the trays to behave like trays in  
some previous HP printers.)  
feed for more information.  
PS DEFER MEDIA affects how  
paper is handled when printing  
from an Adobe PS print driver.  
ENABLED uses HP paper  
handling. DISABLED uses the  
Adobe PS paper handling. The  
default is ENABLED.  
POWERSAVE TIME  
1 MINUTE  
Reduces power consumption  
when the printer has been  
inactive for an extended period.  
15 MINUTES  
30 MINUTES  
60 MINUTES  
90 MINUTES  
2 HOURS  
4 HOURS  
PERSONALITY  
AUTO  
PCL  
PDF  
MIME  
PS  
Sets the default personality to  
automatic switching, PCL, or  
PostScript emulation.  
See Personality for more  
information.  
ENWW  
Configure device menu  
47  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
CLEARABLE WARNINGS  
JOB  
ON  
Sets whether a warning is  
cleared on the control panel or  
when another job is sent.  
more information.  
AUTO CONTINUE  
OFF  
ON  
Determines printer behavior  
when the system generates an  
Auto Continuable error.  
See Auto continue for more  
information.  
SUPPLIES LOW  
STOP  
Sets low supplies reporting  
options.  
CONTINUE  
See Supplies low for more  
information.  
COLOR SUPPLY OUT  
autoContinueBlack  
STOP  
Sets the COLOR SUPPLY  
OUT printer behavior. When a  
color supply is empty and the  
printer is set to  
autoContinueBlack, the  
printer will continue printing  
using black toner only.  
JAM RECOVERY  
OFF  
ON  
Sets whether the printer will  
attempt to reprint pages after a  
jam.  
AUTO  
See Jam recovery for more  
information.  
RAM DISK  
AUTO  
OFF  
Allows you to specify how the  
RAM disk is configured. When  
set to AUTO, the printer  
determines the optimal RAM  
disk size based on the amount  
of available memory. The  
default is AUTO. This message  
displays in models that have a  
hard drive installed.  
LANGUAGE  
A listing of available languages  
appears.  
Sets the default control panel  
language.  
See Language for more  
information.  
I/O menu  
This menu allows you to configure the printer's I/O options.  
48  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Menu item  
Values  
5 - 300  
Description  
I/O TIMEOUT  
Allows you to select the I/O  
timeout in seconds.  
PARALLEL INPUT  
HIGH SPEED  
Submenu that allows access to  
parallel input options. Use  
these options to select the  
speed at which the parallel port  
communicates with the host  
and to enable or disable the  
bidirectional parallel  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS  
communication.  
The default for HIGH SPEED is  
YES. The default for  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS is  
ON.  
EIO X  
Possible values are:  
TCP/IP  
Allows you to configure EIO  
devices installed in slot 1, 2, or  
3.  
(Where X=1, 2, or 3)  
IPX/SPX  
APPLETALK  
DLC/LLC  
LINK SPEED  
Resets menu  
The resets menu allows you to reset factory settings, disable and enable PowerSave, and  
update the printer after new supplies are installed.  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
RESTORE FACTORY  
SETTINGS  
Allows you to clear the page  
buffer, remove all perishable  
personality data, reset the  
printing environment, and  
return all default settings to  
factory defaults. However, this  
menu does not restore  
HP Jetdirect network settings  
to factory default values.  
POWERSAVE  
OFF  
ON  
Allows you to enable and  
disable PowerSave. Default is  
ON  
RESET SUPPLIES  
NEW TRANSFER KIT  
NEW FUSER KIT  
Allows you to inform the printer  
that a new transfer kit or new  
fuser kit has been installed.  
ENWW  
Configure device menu  
49  
   
Diagnostics menu  
The diagnostics menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems  
with the printer.  
Menu item  
Description  
PRINT EVENT LOG  
This item will print an event log  
that will display the last 50  
entries in the printer event log,  
starting with the most recent.  
SHOW EVENT LOG  
This item displays the last 50  
events on the control panel  
display, starting with the most  
recent.  
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING  
DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK  
PAPER PATH TEST  
This item will print a series of  
print quality assessment pages  
that will help troubleshoot any  
print quality problems.  
This item allows you to remove  
a print cartridge to help  
determine which cartridge is  
the source of the problem.  
This item is useful for testing  
the paper handling features of  
the printer, such as the  
configuration of the trays.  
PAPER PATH SENSORS  
This item performs a test on  
each of the printer’s sensors to  
determine if they are working  
correctly and displays the  
status of each sensor.  
MANUAL SENSOR TEST  
COMPONENT TEST  
This item performs a test to  
determine whether the paper  
path sensors are operating  
correctly.  
This item will activate individual  
parts independently to isolate  
noise, leaking, and other  
hardware issues.  
50  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Menu item  
Description  
PRINT/STOP TEST  
This item isolates print quality  
faults more accurately by  
stopping the printer in mid-print  
cycle. Stopping the printer in  
mid-print cycle allows you to  
see where the image begins to  
degrade. Stopping the printer in  
mid-print cycle will cause a jam  
that may need to be manually  
removed. A service  
representative should perform  
this test.  
ENWW  
Diagnostics menu  
51  
Changing printer control panel configuration settings  
By using the printer control panel, you can make changes to general printer configuration  
default settings such as tray size and type, PowerSave Time, printer personality (language),  
and jam recovery.  
The printer control panel can also be accessed from a computer by using the setting page of  
the embedded Web server. The computer shows the same information that the control panel  
shows. For more information, see Using the embedded Web server.  
Configuration settings seldom need to be changed. Hewlett-Packard recommends that only  
the system administrator change configuration settings.  
CAUTION  
Job storage limit  
This option sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs stored on the hard drive at the  
printer. The maximum number allowed is 100, and the default value is 32.  
This option is only available if a hard drive is installed.  
Note  
To set the job storage limit  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to select JOB STORAGE LIMIT.  
7. Press or to change the value.  
8. Press to set the value.  
9. Press MENU.  
Job held timeout  
This option sets the period of time that the system keeps files in job storage before deleting  
them from the queue. The default setting for this option is OFF; the other available settings  
are 1 HOUR, 4 HOURS, 1 DAY, and 1 WEEK.  
This option is only available if a hard drive is installed.  
Note  
To set the job held timeout  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
52  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
           
6. Press to highlight JOB HELD TIMEOUT.  
7. Press to select JOB HELD TIMEOUT.  
8. Press or to select the appropriate time period.  
9. Press to set the time period.  
10. Press MENU.  
Show address  
This item determines whether the printer’s IP address is shown on the display with the  
Ready message. If more than one EIO card is installed, the IP address of the card installed  
in the first slot appears.  
To show the IP address  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight SHOW ADDRESS.  
7. Press to select SHOW ADDRESS.  
8. Press or to select the desired option.  
9. Press to select the option.  
10. Press MENU.  
Color/black mix  
This item allows you to configure printer settings to optimize printer and cartridge  
performance for the printing environment. If the printer is primarily used for black printing  
(over two-thirds of the pages are black only), change the printer settings to MOSTLY  
BLACK PAGES. If the printer is primarily used for color printing, change the printer settings  
to MOSTLY COLOR PAGES. If the printer is used for a mix of black-only and color print  
jobs, it is recommended that you use the printer default of AUTO. To determine the  
percentage of color pages, print a configuration page. See Printer information pages to learn  
how to print a configuration page. The configuration page shows the total number of pages  
printed and the number of color pages printed. To determine the percentage of color pages  
printed, divide the color page count by the total page count.  
To set the color/black mix  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
ENWW  
Changing printer control panel configuration settings  
53  
       
6. Press to highlight COLOR/BLACK MIX.  
7. Press to select COLOR/BLACK MIX.  
8. Press or to select the desired option.  
9. Press to select the option.  
10. Press MENU.  
Tray behavior options: Use Requested Tray and manually feed  
Tray behavior allows three user-defined options:  
USE REQUESTED TRAY—Selecting EXCLUSIVELY ensures that the printer will not  
automatically select another tray when you indicate that a specific tray should be used.  
Selecting FIRST allows the printer to pull from a second tray if the specified tray is  
empty. EXCLUSIVELY is the default setting.  
MANUAL FEED—If you select ALWAYS (the default value), the system always displays  
a prompt before pulling from the multipurpose tray. If you select UNLESS LOADED, the  
system will display the prompt only if the multipurpose tray is empty.  
PS DEFER MEDIA—This setting affects how non-HP PostScript drivers will behave with  
the device. There is no need to change this setting if using the drivers supplied by HP. If  
set to ENABLED, non-HP PostScript drivers will use the HP tray selection method as  
the HP drivers do. If set to DISABLED, some non-HP PostScript drivers will use the  
PostScript tray selection method instead of the HP method.  
To set Use Requested Tray  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.  
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.  
8. Press to select USE REQUESTED TRAY.  
9. Press or to select EXCLUSIVELY or FIRST.  
10. Press to set the behavior.  
11. Press MENU.  
To set manually feed prompt  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.  
54  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.  
8. Press to highlight MANUAL FEED PROMPT.  
9. Press to select MANUAL FEED PROMPT.  
10. Press or to select ALWAYS or UNLESS LOADED.  
11. Press to set the behavior.  
12. Press MENU.  
To set the printer default for PS Defer Media  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR.  
7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR.  
8. Press to select PS DEFER MEDIA.  
9. Press or select ENABLED or DISABLED.  
10. Press to set the behavior.  
11. Press MENU.  
PowerSave Time  
The adjustable PowerSave Time feature reduces power consumption when the printer has  
been inactive for an extended period. You can set the length of time before the printer goes  
into PowerSave mode to 1 MINUTE, 15 MINUTES, 30 MINUTES, or to 60 MINUTES, 90  
MINUTES, 2 HOURS, or 4 HOURS. The default setting is 30 MINUTES.  
The printer display dims when the printer is in PowerSave mode. PowerSave mode does not  
affect printer warm-up time unless the printer was in PowerSave mode for more than 8 hours.  
Note  
To set PowerSave Time  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight POWERSAVE TIME.  
7. Press to select POWERSAVE TIME.  
8. Press or to select the appropriate time period.  
9. Press to set the time period.  
10. Press MENU.  
ENWW  
Changing printer control panel configuration settings  
55  
   
To disable/enable PowerSave  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight RESETS.  
5. Press to select RESETS.  
6. Press to highlight POWERSAVE.  
7. Press to select POWERSAVE.  
8. Press or to select ON or OFF.  
9. Press to set the selection.  
10. Press MENU.  
Personality  
This printer features automatic personality (printer language) switching.  
AUTO configures the printer to automatically detect the type of print job and configure its  
personality to accommodate that job.  
PCL configures the printer to use Printer Control Language.  
PDF configures the printer to print PDF files.  
MIME configures the printer for use with hand-held devices such as cellular phones and  
personal digital assistants (PDAs).  
PS configures the printer to use PostScript emulation.  
To set the personality  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight PERSONALITY.  
7. Press to select PERSONALITY.  
8. Press or to select the appropriate personality (AUTO, PS, PCL, or PDF).  
9. Press to set the personality.  
10. Press MENU.  
56  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
         
Clearable warnings  
You can determine the display time of control panel clearable warnings with this option by  
selecting ON or JOB. The default value is JOB.  
ON displays clearable warnings until you press .  
JOB displays clearable warnings until the end of the job in which it was generated.  
To set the clearable warnings  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight CLEARABLE WARNINGS.  
7. Press to select CLEARABLE WARNINGS.  
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.  
9. Press to set the selection.  
10. Press MENU.  
Auto continue  
You can determine printer behavior when the system generates an Auto Continuable error.  
ON is the default setting.  
ON displays an error message for ten seconds before automatically continuing to print.  
OFF pauses printing any time the printer displays an error message and until you press .  
To set the auto continue  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight AUTO CONTINUE.  
7. Press to select AUTO CONTINUE.  
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.  
9. Press to set the selection.  
10. Press MENU.  
ENWW  
Changing printer control panel configuration settings  
57  
       
Supplies low  
The printer allows two options for reporting that supplies are low; CONTINUE is the default  
value.  
CONTINUE allows the printer to continue printing while displaying a warning until the  
supply is replaced.  
STOP causes the printer to pause printing until you replace the used supply or press ,  
which allows the printer to print while continuing to display the warning.  
To set supplies low reporting  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight SUPPLIES LOW.  
7. Press to select SUPPLIES LOW.  
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.  
9. Press to set the selection.  
10. Press MENU.  
Color supply out  
There are two options for this menu item.  
autoContinueBlack allows the printer to continue printing using black toner only when a  
color supply is empty. A warning message displays on the control panel when the printer  
is in this mode. Printing in this mode is allowed only for a specific number of pages. After  
that, the printer will pause printing until you replace the empty color supply.  
STOP causes the printer to stop printing until the empty color supply is replaced.  
To set color supply out response  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight COLOR SUPPLY OUT.  
7. Press to select COLOR SUPPLY OUT.  
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.  
9. Press to set the selection.  
10. Press MENU.  
58  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
       
Jam recovery  
This option allows you to configure the printer response to paper jams, including how it  
handles the pages involved. AUTO is the default value.  
AUTO—The printer automatically turns jam recovery on when sufficient memory is  
available.  
ON—The printer reprints any page involved in a paper jam. Additional memory is  
allocated to store the last few pages printed, and this might cause overall printer  
performance to suffer.  
OFF—The printer will not reprint any page that was involved in a paper jam. Since no  
memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance might be optimal.  
To set jam recovery response  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY.  
7. Press to select JAM RECOVERY.  
8. Press or to select the appropriate setting.  
9. Press to set the selection.  
10. Press MENU.  
Language  
If the control panel displays LANGUAGE in English, follow the procedure provided below.  
Otherwise, turn the printer off and then back on. When XXXMB appears, press and hold .  
When all three control panel lights are lit, release and follow the procedure provided below  
to set the language.  
To select language  
1. When Select A Language appears in English, press , and wait until the control panel  
displays LANGUAGE in English.  
2. Press until the preferred language displays.  
3. Press to save the preferred language.  
ENWW  
Changing printer control panel configuration settings  
59  
       
Using the printer control panel in shared environments  
Because your printer is shared with other users, adhere to the following guidelines to ensure  
successful printer operation:  
Consult your system administrator before making changes to control panel settings.  
Changing control panel settings could affect other print jobs.  
Coordinate with other users before changing the default printer font or downloading soft  
fonts. Coordinating these operations conserves memory and avoids unexpected printer  
output.  
Be aware that switching printer personalities, such as Emulated PostScript or PCL,  
affects the printed output of other users.  
Your network operating system may automatically protect each user’s print job from the  
effects of other print jobs. Consult your system administrator for more information.  
Note  
60  
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
I/O Configuration  
This chapter describes how to configure certain network parameters on the printer. The  
following topics are covered:  
ENWW  
61  
 
Network configuration  
You might need to configure certain network parameters on the printer. You can configure  
these parameters from the printer control panel, the embedded Web server, or for most  
networks, from the HP Web Jetadmin software (or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh).  
For more information about using the embedded Web server, see Using the embedded Web  
server. For more information about using the HP Toolbox, see Using the HP Toolbox.  
Note  
For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions on configuring network  
parameters from software, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. The  
guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is installed.  
This section contains the following instructions for configuring network parameters from the  
printer control panel:  
configuring TCP/IP parameters  
disabling unused network protocols  
configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters  
Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters  
The HP Jetdirect print server automatically selects a NetWare frame type. Select a frame  
type manually only when the print server selects an incorrect frame type. To identify the  
frame type chosen by the HP Jetdirect print server, print a configuration page from the  
printer control panel. See Printer information pages.  
To configure the Novell NetWare parameters from the printer control  
panel  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight IPX/SPX.  
9. Press to select IPX/SPX.  
10. Press to highlight FRAME TYPE.  
11. Press to highlight the desired frame type.  
12. Press to select the frame type.  
13. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
62  
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration  
ENWW  
       
Configuring TCP/IP parameters  
You can use the printer control panel to configure the following TCP/IP parameters:  
usage of the BOOTP file for configuration parameters (the default is to use the BOOTP  
file)  
IP address (4 bytes)  
subnet mask (4 bytes)  
default gateway (4 bytes)  
idle TCP/IP connection timeout (in seconds)  
To automatically configure TCP/IP parameters from the printer control  
panel  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight TCP/IP.  
9. Press to select TCP/IP.  
10. Press to select CONFIG METHOD.  
11. Press to highlight AUTO IP.  
12. Press to select AUTO IP.  
13. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
To manually configure TCP/IP parameters from the printer control panel  
Use manual configuration to set an IP address, subnet mask, and local and default gateway.  
Setting an IP address  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to select EIO X.  
7. Press to highlight TCP/IP.  
8. Press to select TCP/IP.  
9. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS.  
ENWW  
Network configuration  
63  
     
10. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS.  
11. Press to highlight MANUAL.  
12. Press to highlight IP ADDRESS.  
13. Press to select IP ADDRESS.  
The first of three sets of numbers is highlighted. If there is not a number highlighted, a  
highlighted empty underscore appears.  
Note  
14. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring the IP address.  
15. Press to move to the next set of numbers.  
16. Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the correct IP address is entered.  
17. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
Setting the subnet mask  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight TCP/IP.  
9. Press to select TCP/IP.  
10. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS.  
11. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS.  
12. Press to highlight SUBNET MASK.  
13. Press to select SUBNET MASK.  
The first of three sets of numbers is highlighted.  
Note  
14. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring the subnet mask.  
15. Press to move to the next set of numbers.  
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the correct subnet mask is entered.  
17. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
Setting the syslog server  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
64  
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration  
ENWW  
   
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight TCP/IP.  
9. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS.  
10. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS.  
11. Press to highlight SYSLOG SERVER.  
12. Press to select SYSLOG SERVER.  
The first of four sets of numbers are the default settings. Each set of numbers represents  
one byte of information and has a range from 0 to 255.  
Note  
13. Press the or arrow to increase or decrease the number for the first byte of the  
default gateway.  
14.  
Press to move to the next set of numbers. (Press  
numbers.)  
to move to the previous set of  
15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 until the correct subnet mask is entered.  
16. Press to save the syslog server.  
17. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
Setting the local and default gateway  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight TCP/IP.  
9. Press to select TCP/IP.  
10. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS.  
11. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS.  
12. Press to highlight LOCAL GATEWAY or DEFAULT GATEWAY.  
13. Press to select LOCAL GATEWAY or DEFAULT GATEWAY.  
The first of three sets of numbers are the default settings. If there is not a number  
highlighted, a highlighted empty underscore appears.  
Note  
14. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring LOCAL or DEFAULT  
GATEWAY.  
15. Press to move to the next set of numbers.  
16. Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the correct subnet mask is entered.  
17. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
ENWW  
Network configuration  
65  
 
Disabling network protocols (optional)  
By factory default, all supported network protocols are enabled. Disabling unused protocols  
has the following benefits:  
decreases printer-generated network traffic  
prevents unauthorized users from printing to the printer  
provides only pertinent information on the configuration page  
allows the printer control panel to display protocol-specific error and warning messages  
TCP/IP configuration cannot be disabled on the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer.  
Note  
Note  
To disable IPX/SPX  
Do not disable this protocol if Windows 95/98, Windows NT, ME, 2000, and XP users will be  
printing to the printer.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight IPX/SPX.  
9. Press to select IPX/SPX.  
10. Press to highlight ENABLE.  
11. Press to select ENABLE  
12. Press to highlight ON or OFF.  
13. Press to select ON or OFF.  
14. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
To disable DLC/LLC  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight DLC/LLC.  
9. Press to select DLC/LLC.  
66  
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration  
ENWW  
     
10. Press to highlight ENABLE.  
11. Press to select ENABLE.  
12. Press to highlight ON or OFF.  
13. Press to select ON or OFF.  
14. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
Setting the idle timeout  
1. Press to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight TCP/IP.  
9. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS.  
10. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS.  
11. Press to highlight IDLE TIMEOUT.  
12. Press to select IDLE TIMEOUT.  
13. Press the or arrow to to increase or decrease the number of seconds for the idle  
timeout.  
14. Press to save the idle timeout.  
15. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
Setting the link speed  
By factory default, the link speed is set to AUTO. Use the following procedure to set a  
specific speed:  
1. Press to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight I/O.  
5. Press to select I/O.  
6. Press to highlight EIO X (where X = 1, 2, or 3).  
7. Press to select EIO X.  
8. Press to highlight LINK SPEED.  
9. Press to select LINK SPEED.  
ENWW  
Network configuration  
67  
   
10. Press to highlight the desired link speed.  
11. Press to select the desired link speed.  
12. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
68  
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration  
ENWW  
Parallel configuration  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer supports network and parallel connections at the  
same time. A parallel connection is made by connecting the printer to the computer using a  
bidirectional parallel cable (IEEE-1284 compliant) with a c-connector plugged into the  
printer’s parallel port. The cable can be a maximum of 10 meters (33 feet) long.  
When used to describe a parallel interface, the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is  
able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the  
parallel port.  
Parallel port connection  
1
2
c-connector  
parallel port  
To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface such as bidirectional  
communication between the computer and printer, faster transfer of data, and automatic  
configuration of printer drivers, ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed. For  
more information, see Printer drivers.  
Note  
Note  
Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more  
network connections on the printer. If you are experiencing problems, see Network  
ENWW  
Parallel configuration  
69  
   
USB configuration  
This printer supports a USB 1.1 connection. The port is located on the back of the printer, as  
shown in the figure below. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable.  
USB support is not available for computers running Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.  
Note  
USB connection  
1
2
USB connector  
USB port  
70  
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration  
ENWW  
   
Jetlink connection configuration  
This printer supports a Jetlink connection for paper handling input devices. The port is  
located on the back of the printer, as shown in the figure below.  
Jetlink connection  
1
Jetlink connection port  
ENWW  
Jetlink connection configuration  
71  
   
Enhanced I/O (EIO) configuration  
This printer comes equipped with three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots. The three EIO  
slots hold compatible external devices such as the HP Jetdirect print server network cards,  
HP EIO hard drive, or other devices. Plugging EIO network cards into the slots increases the  
number of network interfaces available to the printer.  
EIO network cards can maximize printer performance when you are printing from a network.  
In addition they provide the ability to place the printer anywhere on a network. This  
eliminates the need to attach the printer directly to a server or a workstation and enables you  
to place the printer closer to the network users.  
If the printer is configured through an EIO network card, configure that card through the  
control panel Configure device menu.  
HP Jetdirect print servers  
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) can be installed in one of the printer’s EIO slots.  
These cards support multiple network protocols and operating systems. HP Jetdirect print  
servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly to your  
network at any location. HP Jetdirect print servers also support the Simple Network  
Management Protocol (SNMP), which provides network managers with remote printer  
management and troubleshooting through HP Web Jetadmin software.  
Installation of these cards and network configuration should be performed by a network  
administrator. Configure the card either through the control panel, the printer installation  
software, or with HP Web Jetadmin software.  
Note  
Note  
Refer to the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for information on which external  
devices or EIO network cards are supported.  
Available enhanced I/O interfaces  
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) provide software solutions for:  
Novell NetWare Network  
Microsoft Windows and Windows NT networks  
Apple Mac OS (AppleTalk)  
UNIX (HP-UX and Solaris)  
Linux (Red Hat and SuSE)  
Internet printing  
For a summary of available network software solutions, refer to the HP Jetdirect Print Server  
Administrator’s Guide, or visit HP Customer Care online at http://www.hp.com/support/  
NetWare networks  
When using Novell NetWare products with an HP Jetdirect print server, Queue Server mode  
provides improved printing performance over Remote Printer mode. The HP Jetdirect print  
server supports Novell Directory Services (NDS) as well as bindery modes. For more  
information, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide.  
72  
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration  
ENWW  
             
For Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, and XP systems, use the printer installation utility for  
printer setup on a NetWare network.  
Windows and Windows NT networks  
For Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, and XP systems, use your printer installation utility for  
printer setup on a Microsoft Windows network. The utility supports printer setup for either  
peer-to-peer or client-server network operation.  
AppleTalk networks  
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to set up the printer on an EtherTalk or LocalTalk network. For  
more information, refer to the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide included with  
printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server.  
UNIX/Linux networks  
Use the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX utility to set up the printer on HP-UX or Sun  
Solaris networks.  
For setup and management on UNIX or Linux networks, use HP Web Jetadmin.  
To obtain HP software for UNIX/Linux networks, visit HP Customer Care online at  
http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing. For other installation options supported by the  
HP Jetdirect print server, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide included  
with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server.  
ENWW  
Enhanced I/O (EIO) configuration  
73  
           
Wireless printing  
Wireless networks offer a safe, secure, and cost-effective alternative to traditional wired  
network connections. See Supplies and accessories for a list of available wireless print  
servers.  
IEEE 802.11b standard  
With the wireless HP Jetdirect 802.11b external print server, HP peripherals can be placed  
anywhere in the office or home and connected to a wireless network running Microsoft,  
Apple, Netware, UNIX, or Linux network operating systems. This wireless technology  
provides a high-quality printing solution without the physical constraints of wiring. Peripherals  
can be conveniently placed anywhere in an office or home and can be easily moved without  
changing network cables.  
Installation is easy with the HP Install Network Printer Wizard.  
HP Jetdirect 802.11b print servers are available for adapting wireless printing to USB and  
parallel connections.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth wireless technology is a low-power, short-range radio technology that can be used  
to wirelessly connect computers, printers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), cell phones,  
and other devices.  
Unlike infrared technology, Bluetooth’s reliance on radio signals means that devices do not  
have to be in the same room, office, or cubicle with an unobstructed line of sight in order to  
communicate. This wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business  
network applications.  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer uses a Bluetooth adapter (hp bt1300) to  
incorporate Bluetooth wireless technology. The adapter is available for either USB or parallel  
connections. The adapter has a 10-meter, line-of-site operation range in the 2.5 GHz ISM  
band and can achieve data transfer rates up to 723 Kbps. The device supports the following  
Bluetooth profiles:  
Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP)  
Serial Port Profile (SPP)  
Object Push Profile (OPP)  
Basic Imaging Profile (BIP)  
Basic Printing Profile (BPP) with XHTML-Print  
74  
Chapter 3 I/O Configuration  
ENWW  
       
Printing tasks  
This chapter describes how to perform basic printing tasks. The following topics are covered:  
ENWW  
75  
 
Controlling print jobs  
Three settings affect the printer driver's ability to specify how paper should be pulled in the  
printer. The Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print  
Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. If you do not change these settings, the  
printer automatically selects a tray using the default printer settings.  
Source  
Printing by Source means you choose a specific tray from which you want the printer to pull  
paper. The printer tries to print from this tray, no matter what type or size is loaded in it. If  
you choose a tray that is configured for a type or size that does not match your print job, the  
printer does not print automatically. Instead, it waits for you to load the tray you chose with  
the type or size of print paper for your print job. If you load the tray correctly, the printer  
begins printing. If you press , the display allows you to choose from other loaded trays.  
If you have difficulties printing by Source and want the printer to autoswitch from the  
Note  
Type and Size  
Printing by Type or Size means you want the printer to pull paper or print paper from the first  
tray that is loaded with the type or size that you choose. Selecting paper by Type rather than  
Source is similar to locking out trays and helps protect special paper from accidental use.  
(However, selecting the Any setting does not enable this tray lockout function.) For example,  
if a tray is configured for letterhead, and you specify the driver to print on plain paper, the  
printer will not pull the letterhead from that tray. Instead, it will pull paper from a tray that has  
plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the printer control panel. Selecting  
paper by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper, glossy  
paper, and transparencies. Using the wrong setting can result in unsatisfactory print quality.  
Always print by Type for special print media such as labels or grayscale transparencies.  
Always print by Size for envelopes.  
If you want to print by Type or Size and the trays have not been configured for that type  
or size, in the printer driver, select the Type or Size from the Page Setup dialog box, the  
Print dialog box, or the Print Properties dialog box. The printer will prompt you to load  
that type and size.  
If you often print on a certain type or size of paper, the printer administrator (for a  
network printer) or you (for a local printer) can configure a tray for that type or size (see  
when you choose that type or size as you print a job, the printer pulls from the tray  
configured for that type or size.  
Print setting priorities  
Changes made to print settings are prioritized (or take precedence) depending on where the  
changes are made:  
76  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
         
The names of commands and dialog boxes may vary depending on your program.  
Note  
Page Setup dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Page Setup or a similar  
command on the File menu of the program you are working in. Settings changed here  
override settings changed anywhere else.  
Print dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Print, Print Setup, or a similar  
command on the File menu of the program you are working in. Settings changed in the  
Print dialog box have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page  
Setup dialog box.  
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver). The printer driver opens when you click  
Properties in the Print dialog box. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog  
box do not override settings available anywhere else.  
Printer menu settings. Lowest priority and often used if software drivers do not have that  
option.  
Default printer settings. The default printer driver settings determine settings used in all  
print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties  
dialog boxes, as described above. There are several ways to change the default printer  
settings depending on the operating system: 1) click Start, Settings, Printers, and then  
right-click the printer icon and click Properties; 2) click Start, Control Panel, and then  
select the Printers folder; right-click the printer icon and click Properties.  
To avoid affecting print jobs of other users, make printer setup changes through the software  
application or the printer driver whenever possible. Printer setup changes made through the  
control panel become default settings for subsequent jobs. Changes made through an  
application or the printer driver affect only that specific job.  
CAUTION  
ENWW  
Controlling print jobs  
77  
Selecting print media  
You can use many types of paper and other print media with this printer. This section  
provides guidelines and specifications for selecting and using different print media.  
Before purchasing any paper or specialized forms in quantity, verify that your paper supplier  
obtains and understands the print media requirements specified in the HP LaserJet Printer  
Family Print Media Guide.  
See Supplies and accessories for HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide ordering  
information. To download a copy of the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide go to  
It is possible that paper could meet all of the guidelines in this chapter and still not print  
satisfactorily. This may be due to abnormal characteristics of the printing environment or to  
other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control (for example, extremes in  
temperature and humidity).  
Hewlett-Packard recommends testing any paper before buying it in large quantities.  
Using paper that does not conform to the specifications listed here or in the print media  
guide can cause problems that require service. This service is not covered by the Hewlett-  
Packard warranty or service agreements.  
CAUTION  
Media to avoid  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer can handle many types of paper. Use of paper  
outside the printer’s specifications will cause a loss of print quality and increase the chance  
of paper jams occuring.  
Do not use paper that is too rough.  
Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations other than standard 3-hole punched paper.  
Do not use multipart forms.  
Do not use paper that has already been printed on or that has been fed through a  
photocopier.  
Do not use paper with a watermark if you are printing solid patterns.  
Media that may damage the printer  
In rare circumstances paper can damage the printer. The following paper must be avoided to  
prevent possible damage:  
Do not use paper with staples attached.  
Do not use transparencies designed for Inkjet printers or other low temperature printers.  
Use only transparencies that are specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers.  
Do not use photo paper intended for Inkjet printers.  
Do not use paper that is embossed or coated and is not designed for the temperatures  
of the HP Color LaserJet 5550 image fuser. Select paper that can tolerate temperatures  
of 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second. HP produces a selection of paper that is designed for  
the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer.  
78  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
       
Do not use letterhead paper with low temperature dyes or thermography. Preprinted  
forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for  
0.1 second.  
Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions, or that melts, offsets, or  
discolors when exposed to 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.  
To order HP Color LaserJet printing supplies, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies in  
the U.S. or to http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html worldwide.  
ENWW  
Selecting print media  
79  
Configuring input trays  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer allows you to configure input trays by type and  
size. You can load different paper in the printer input trays and then request paper by type or  
size.  
If you have used previous HP Color LaserJet printers, you might be accustomed to  
configuring Tray 1 to first mode or cassette mode. To mimic the settings for first mode,  
configure Tray 1 for Size =ANY and Type = ANY. The printer will pull paper from Tray 1 first  
when the print job does not specify another tray. This setting is recommended if you use  
different types or sizes of paper. To mimic the settings from cassette mode, set either the  
size or type for Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY. This setting is recommended if you are  
using the same size and type of paper in Tray 1.  
Note  
If you use two-sided printing (duplex), be sure that the paper loaded meets the specifications  
for duplex printing. (See Supported paper weights and sizes.)  
Note  
Note  
The instructions below are to configure the trays at the printer control panel. You can also  
configure the trays from your computer by accessing the embedded Web server. See Using  
Letter and A4 sizes can be loaded with the long-edge or short-edge leading into the printer.  
Long-edge first is the preferred orientation. Long-edge feed gives greater throughput, and  
lower consumable usage. Short-edge feed is called the rotated orientation, and is identified  
in the trays as LTR-R and A4-R. Short-edge feed can be useful when printing on media with  
special features, such as perforations or windows.  
Configuring trays when the printer gives a prompt  
In the following situations, the printer automatically prompts you to configure the tray for type  
and size:  
when you load paper into the tray, on tray close you will see Tray X <TYPE> <SIZE>.  
To change the type or size, press .  
when you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver  
or a software application and the tray is not configured to match the print job’s settings.  
You will see LOAD TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE>.  
The control panel displays this message: LOAD TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE>, to change size or  
type, press . The instructions below explain how to configure the tray after the prompt  
appears.  
The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and if Tray 1 is configured for  
Note  
ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE.  
Loading Tray 1 for one-time use  
Follow this procedure if the tray is usually left empty and is used for a variety of sizes or  
types of paper.  
To avoid jams, never add or remove a tray during printing.  
CAUTION  
80  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
       
1. Open the tray.  
2. Remove any paper that is in the tray.  
3. Move the side guides all the way out.  
4. Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed on facing down, and the top of the  
paper on the left. Make sure that the stack height of the paper does not exceed the  
maximum stack height mark in the tray.  
If you are duplexing, see Two-sided (duplex) printing for load instructions.  
Note  
5. Move the side guides to the correct position so that they will lightly touch the paper stack  
but will not bend the paper.  
6. Look at the display within a few seconds of loading the paper (reinsert the paper if the  
time has already elapsed). If the printer does not display the Tray X <TYPE> <SIZE>  
message, the tray is ready for use.  
ENWW  
Configuring input trays  
81  
7. If the printer displays Tray X <TYPE> <SIZE>, press to change the size and type  
configuration.  
8. The size menu appears.  
9. Press to highlight ANY SIZE.  
10. Press to select ANY SIZE.  
11. The type menu appears.  
12. Press to highlight ANY TYPE.  
13. Press to select ANY TYPE.  
14.  
The printer displays Tray X ANY SIZE ANY TYPE. Press  
to accept the size/type  
settings and exit the message. The tray is ready for use.  
Loading Tray 1 when the same paper is used for multiple  
print jobs  
Follow this procedure if Tray 1 continues to be loaded with the same type of paper and the  
paper is not removed from the tray between jobs. This procedure may also increase the  
printer performance when printing from Tray 1.  
To avoid jams, never add or remove a tray during printing.  
CAUTION  
1. Before loading the paper, from the Control panel, press the MENU key to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press or to highlight PAPER HANDLING.  
3. Press to display PAPER HANDLING menu.  
4. Press or to highlight TRAY 1 SIZE.  
5. Press to display the TRAY 1 SIZE values.  
6. Press or to highlight the correct size.  
7. Press to select the size.  
If selecting CUSTOM, also select the unit of measure, the X and the Y dimensions.  
Note  
8. Press or to highlight TRAY 1 TYPE.  
9. Press to display the TRAY 1 TYPE values.  
10. Press or to highlight the correct type.  
11. Press to select the type.  
12. Press MENU to exit MENUS.  
82  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
 
13. Open the tray.  
14. Move the side guides out.  
15. Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed on facing down, and the top of the  
paper on the left. Make sure that the stack height of the paper does not exceed the  
maximum stack height mark in the tray.  
If you are duplexing, see Two-sided (duplex) printing for load instructions.  
Note  
16. Adjust the side guides so that they will lightly touch the paper stack but will not bend the  
paper.  
17. The printer displays the tray configuration. It should match the size and type set in steps  
1-12 above. Press  
use.  
to accept the settings and exit the message. The tray is ready for  
ENWW  
Configuring input trays  
83  
Printing envelopes from Tray 1  
Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or  
other synthetic materials can severely damage the printer. To avoid jams and possible  
printer damage, never try to print on both sides of an envelope. Before you load envelopes,  
make sure they are flat, undamaged, and not stuck together. Do not use envelopes with  
pressure-sensitive adhesive. To avoid jams, do not remove or insert envelopes during  
printing.  
CAUTION  
Many types of envelopes can be printed from Tray 1. Up to 20 envelopes can be stacked in  
the tray. Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope.  
In the software, set margins at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) from the edge of the envelope.  
To load envelopes into Tray 1  
To avoid paper jams, do not remove or insert envelopes during printing.  
1. Open Tray 1.  
CAUTION  
2. Load up to 20 envelopes in the center of Tray 1 with the side to be printed on facing  
down, top on the left, and the short edge toward the printer. Slide the envelopes into the  
printer as far as they will go without forcing them.  
84  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
   
3. Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes. Make sure  
the envelopes fit under the tabs on the guides.  
Printing envelopes  
1. In the printer control panel, set the paper size for Tray 1 to match the size envelope you  
are printing.  
2. Specify Tray 1 or select the paper source by size in the printer driver.  
3. If your software does not automatically format an envelope, specify Landscape for page  
orientation in your software application or printer driver. Use the guidelines in the table  
that follows to set margins for return and destination addresses on Commercial #10 or  
DL envelopes.  
For envelopes of other sizes, adjust the margin settings appropriately.  
Note  
4. Select Print from the software application or printer driver.  
Address type  
Return  
Left margin  
Top margin  
15 mm (0.6 inches)  
102 mm (4.0 inches)  
15 mm (0.6 inches)  
51 mm (2.0 inches)  
Destination  
Loading detectable media into Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5  
Follow this procedure to load detectable standard-size paper in the tray. The detectable  
sizes are marked in the tray and include Letter, Letter-Rotated, A4, A4-Rotated, A3, 11 x 17  
Legal, B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), A5, and Executive.  
To avoid jams, never add or remove a tray during printing.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
The paper path for Tray 3 passes through Tray 2. If Tray 2 is partially pulled out or removed,  
paper from Tray 3 cannot feed into the printer. This causes the printer to stop and generate  
a message that Tray 2 must be installed. Similarly, Trays 2, 3, and 4 must be closed for  
paper from Tray 5 to feed into the printer.  
Do not print cardstock, envelopes, or unsupported sizes of media from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.  
Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it  
is in use. Doing so can cause paper jams.  
CAUTION  
ENWW  
Configuring input trays  
85  
 
1. Open the tray.  
2. Adjust the rear paper guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the  
guide to the length of the media being used.  
3. Adjust the paper width guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the  
guide to the width of the media being used.  
86  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
4. Load media face-up, making sure that the stack height of the paper does not exceed the  
maximum stack height mark in the tray.  
5. Verify that the tray switch is set to STANDARD.  
6. Close the tray.  
7. The printer displays the tray size and type configuration. (If the tray configuration is no  
longer displayed, open and close the tray again.)  
8.  
If the size and type are correct, press  
to accept the settings.  
9. To change the size or type, press when the tray configuration is displayed. The TRAY  
X SIZE= *<SIZE> menu appears.  
10. Press or to highlight the correct size.  
11. Press to select the size. A Setting saved message appears followed by the tray type  
menu.  
Depending on the size selected, the printer might prompt you to move the CUSTOM/  
STANDARD switch in the tray to another position or to move the length/width guides. Follow  
the instructions in the prompt, close the tray, and follow these steps from the beginning.  
Note  
12. To change the type, press or to highlight the correct paper type.  
13. Press to select the paper type. A Setting saved message appears, and then the  
current type and size settings are displayed again.  
14.  
If size and type are now correct, press  
to accept the size and type settings, and then  
exit the message. The tray is ready to use.  
ENWW  
Configuring input trays  
87  
Loading undetectable/standard size media into Trays 2, 3, 4,  
and 5  
Follow this procedure to load undetectable standard-size paper in the tray. The undetectable  
standard sizes include 16K, 8K, Executive (JIS), 8.5x13.  
To avoid jams, never add or remove a tray during printing.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
The paper path for Tray 3 passes through Tray 2. If Tray 2 is partially pulled out or removed,  
paper from Tray 3 cannot feed into the printer. This causes the printer to stop and generate  
a message that Tray 2 must be installed. Similarly, Trays 2, 3, and 4 must be closed for  
paper from Tray 5 to feed into the printer.  
Do not print cardstock, envelopes, or unsupported sizes of media from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.  
Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it  
is in use. Doing so can cause paper jams.  
CAUTION  
1. Open the tray.  
88  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
 
2. Slide the paper width and length guides all the way out.  
3. Load media face-up, making sure that the stack height of the paper does not exceed the  
maximum stack height mark in the tray.  
4. Slide the paper width and length guides in, making sure that they gently touch the paper.  
5. Verify that the tray switch is set to CUSTOM.  
ENWW  
Configuring input trays  
89  
6. Close the tray.  
7. The printer displays the tray size and type configuration  
8.  
If the size and type are correct, press  
to accept the settings, and exit the message.  
9. To change the size or type, press when the tray configuration is displayed (If the tray  
configuration is no longer displayed, open and close the tray again). The TRAY X SIZE=  
*<SIZE> menu appears.  
10. Press or to highlight the correct size.  
11. Press to select the size. A Setting saved message appears followed by the tray type  
menu.  
Depending on the size selected, the printer might prompt you to move the CUSTOM/  
STANDARD switch in Tray to another position or to move the length/width guides. Follow the  
instructions in the prompt, close the tray, and follow these steps from the beginning.  
Note  
12. To change the type, press or to highlight the correct paper type.  
13. Press to select the paper type. A Setting saved message appears, and then the  
current type and size settings are displayed again.  
14.  
If size and type are now correct, press  
the message. The tray is ready to use.  
to accept the size and type settings, and exit  
Loading custom media into Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5  
Follow this procedure to load custom size paper in the tray.  
To avoid jams, never add or remove a tray during printing.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
The paper path for Tray 3 passes through Tray 2. If Tray 2 is partially pulled out or removed,  
paper from Tray 3 cannot feed into the printer. This causes the printer to stop and generate  
a message that Tray 2 must be installed. Similarly, Trays 2, 3, and 4 must be closed for  
paper from Tray 5 to feed into the printer.  
Do not print cardstock, envelopes, or unsupported sizes of media from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.  
Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it  
is in use. Doing so can cause paper jams.  
CAUTION  
90  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
 
1. Open the tray.  
2. Slide the paper width and length guides all the way out.  
ENWW  
Configuring input trays  
91  
3. Load media face-up, making sure that the stack height of the paper does not exceed the  
maximum stack height mark in the tray.  
4. Slide the paper width and length guides in, making sure that they gently touch the paper.  
5. Note the orientation of the paper and which dimension is the X dimension and which is  
the Y dimension. X and Y dimensions are marked in the tray, for your convenience.  
X
Y
1
2
3
CUSTOM/STANDARD switch  
Page width (X dimension)  
Page length (Y dimension)  
6. Verify that the tray switch is set to CUSTOM.  
7. Close the tray.  
8. The printer displays the tray configuration. Look at the display.  
92  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
9.  
If the size and type are correct, press  
to accept the settings and exit the message. If  
the settings are not correct, continue with this procedure.  
If the size is listed as CUSTOM, it means the tray size is set to ANY CUSTOM meaning that  
it will match any custom job even if the dimensions are different. The size can be changed to  
CUSTOM with exact dimensions if desired. When set to CUSTOM, the dimensions will show  
instead of the word CUSTOM on the tray configuration message.  
Note  
10. To change the size or type, press when the tray configuration is displayed. (If the tray  
configuration is no longer displayed, open and close the tray again). The TRAY X SIZE=  
*<SIZE> menu appears.  
11. Press to select CUSTOM. The UNIT OF MEASURE menu appears.  
Depending on the size selected, the printer might prompt you to move the CUSTOM/  
STANDARD switch in the tray to another position or to move the length/width guides. Follow  
the instructions in the prompt, close the tray, and follow these steps from the beginning.  
Note  
12. Press or arrows to highlight the correct unit (either millimeters or inches).  
13. Press to select the X value. The X DIMENSION menu appears.  
14. Press or to change the X dimension value until it is correct.  
15. Press to select the value. The Y DIMENSION menu appears.  
16. Press or to change the Y dimension value until it is correct.  
17. Press to select the value. A Setting saved message appears, and then the Tray X  
TYPE menu appears.  
18. To change the type, press or to highlight the correct paper type.  
19. Press to select the paper type. A Setting saved message appears, and then the  
current type and size settings are displayed again.  
20.  
If size and type are now correct, press  
The tray is ready for use.  
to accept the settings and exit the message.  
Configuring trays using the Paper Handling menu  
You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the printer. Use the  
paper handling menu to configure the trays as follows.  
Configuring the paper size  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight PAPER HANDLING.  
3. Press to select PAPER HANDLING.  
4. Press to highlight TRAY <N> SIZE. (N represents the number of the tray you are  
configuring.)  
5. Press to select TRAY <N> SIZE.  
6. Press or to highlight the correct size.  
ENWW  
Configuring input trays  
93  
 
7. Press to select the correct size.  
Depending on the tray you are configuring and the size selected, the printer might prompt  
you to adjust the tray guides or to move the CUSTOM/STANDARD switch in the tray to the  
other position. Follow the instructions in the prompt, and then close the tray.  
Note  
Configuring the paper type  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight PAPER HANDLING.  
3. Press to select PAPER HANDLING.  
4. Press to highlight TRAY <N> TYPE. (N represents the number of the tray you are  
configuring.)  
5. Press to select TRAY <N> TYPE.  
6. Press or to highlight the correct paper type.  
7. Press to select the correct paper type.  
A Setting saved message appears, and then the current type and size settings are  
displayed.  
94  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
Printing on special media  
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media.  
Special media such as envelopes or cardstock should be printed from Tray 1.  
Note  
To print on any special media, use the following procedure:  
1. Load the media in the paper tray.  
2. When the printer prompts you for the paper type, select the correct media type for the  
paper loaded in the tray. For example, select HIGH GLOSS IMAGES when loading  
HP High Gloss Laser Paper  
3. In the software application or the printer driver, set the media type to match the media  
type that is loaded in the paper tray.  
For the best print quality, always verify that the media type selected on the printer control  
panel and the media type selected in the application or printer driver match the type of  
media loaded in the tray.  
Note  
Transparencies  
When printing on transparencies, use the following guidelines:  
Handle transparencies using the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on the  
transparency can cause print quality problems.  
Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this printer. Hewlett-Packard  
recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies with this printer. HP products are  
designed to work together for optimum printing results.  
In either the software application or the driver, select Transparency as the media type,  
or print from a tray that is configured for transparencies. Use the control panel to set the  
media type.  
For more information about how to access the printer drivers, see Accessing the printer  
Transparencies not designed for LaserJet printing will melt in the printer, causing damage to  
the printer.  
CAUTION  
Glossy paper  
In either the software application or the driver, select Glossy, Heavy Glossy, or High  
Gloss as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.  
Select Glossy for media weights up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond). Select Heavy glossy for  
media weights of 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond) and heavier.  
Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY or HEAVY GLOSSY for the  
input tray being used.  
Hewlett-Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Soft Gloss paper with this printer.  
HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results. If HP Color LaserJet  
Soft Gloss paper is not used with this printer, print quality may be compromised.  
Note  
ENWW  
Printing on special media  
95  
         
Colored paper  
Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper.  
Pigments used must be able to withstand the printer fusing temperature of 190°C (374°  
F) for 0.1 second without deterioration.  
Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced.  
The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots, overlaying and varying their  
spacing to produce various colors. Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the  
shades of the printed colors.  
Printing images  
To obtain the best print quality when printing images, such as photographs or posters, use  
High Gloss Laser Paper (Q2420A) with the HP High Gloss (Images) media type setting.  
In either the software application or the printer driver, select HP High Gloss (images)  
as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.  
You can also configure the printer using settings on the printer control panel. See  
Configuring input trays for more information.  
Use the control panel to set the media type to HIGH GLOSS IMAGES for the tray being  
used.  
Envelopes  
Envelopes can be printed only from Tray 1. Set the tray’s media size to the specific envelope  
Note  
Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure proper printing on envelopes and help  
prevent printer jams:  
Do not load more than 20 envelopes into Tray 1.  
The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond).  
Envelopes should be flat.  
Do not use envelopes with windows or clasps.  
Envelopes must not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.  
Envelopes with peel-off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat  
and pressures of the printer’s fusing process.  
Envelopes should be loaded face-down with the top of the envelope to the left, and the  
short edge feeding into the printer first.  
In high humidity environments, envelopes should be printed with the flap on the leading  
edge to reduce sealing of the flap during printing. For long edge printing, envelopes should  
be loaded long edge first, face-down. See Printing envelopes from Tray 1 to change the  
envelope orientation.  
Note  
96  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
           
Labels  
For printing labels, set the tray’s media type to LABELS in the printer control panel. See  
Note  
Configuring input trays. When printing labels, use the following guidelines:  
Verify that the labels’ adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for  
0.1 second.  
Verify that there is no exposed adhesive material between the labels. Exposed areas  
can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause printer jams. Exposed  
adhesive can also cause damage to printer components.  
Do not re-feed a sheet of labels.  
Verify that labels lie flat.  
Do not use labels that are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.  
Heavy paper  
The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer.  
Paper type  
Paper weight  
105-119 g/m2  
28-31 lb  
Heavy  
120-163 g/m2  
32-43 lb  
Extra heavy  
Cardstock  
164-200 g/m2  
44-53 lb  
When printing on heavy paper types, use the following guidelines:  
Use Tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 (43 lb bond up to 53 lb  
bond).  
For optimum results when printing on heavy paper, use the printer control panel to set  
the media type for the tray to match the paper type.  
In either the software application or the driver, select Heavy, Extra Heavy, or  
Cardstock as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper.  
Because this setting affects all print jobs, it is important to return the printer back to its  
original settings once the job has printed. See Configuring input trays.  
In general do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification recommended for  
this printer. Doing so can cause misfeeds, paper jams, reduced print quality, and excessive  
mechanical wear.  
CAUTION  
ENWW  
Printing on special media  
97  
       
HP LaserJet Tough paper  
Tough paper is a robust plastic film that will not tear and withstands the weather. When  
printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper, use the following guidelines:  
Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper using the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on  
HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print quality problems.  
Use only Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Tough paper with this printer. HP Products are  
designed to work together for optimum printing results.  
In either the software application or the driver, select Tough Paper as the media type, or  
print from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper.  
Preprinted forms and letterhead  
Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead:  
Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant inks that will not melt, vaporize,  
or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing temperature of  
approximately 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.  
Inks must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers.  
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes  
during storage.  
Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the  
paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off of preprinted paper.  
When duplex printing, load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5  
face-down with the top edge of the page to the left. To load pre-printed forms and  
letterhead into Tray 1, load them face-up with the top edge of the page to the left.  
When simplex printing, load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5  
face-up with the top edge of the page to the left. To load pre-printed forms and  
letterhead into Tray 1, load them face-down with the top edge of the page to the left.  
Recycled paper  
This printer supports the use of recycled paper. Recycled paper must meet the same  
specifications as standard paper. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.  
Hewlett-Packard recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5% ground wood.  
98  
Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
           
Two-sided (duplex) printing  
Some printer models are capable of automatic duplex printing (printing on both sides of a  
page). To find out which models support automatic two-sided printing, see Printer  
configurations. All printer models support manual two-sided printing.  
You must specify two-sided printing options in your software application or in the printer  
driver in order to print on both sides of the page. If this option is not visible in the software  
application or printer driver, use the following information to make duplex printing options  
available.  
Note  
To use two-sided printing:  
Verify that the printer driver is configured to show the two-sided printing options:  
automatic and/or manual. For instructions, see the online Help for the printer driver or for  
more information about how to access the printer drivers, see Accessing the printer  
Once the two-sided printing option is shown, select the appropriate two-sided printing  
options in the printer driver software. Two-sided printing options include page and  
binding orientation. For more information about options for binding two-sided printing  
Automatic two-sided printing is not supported for certain media types, including  
transparencies, envelopes, cardstock, tough paper and labels.  
Automatic two-sided printing only supports 11 x 17, A3, letter, letter_R, legal, A4, A4-R,  
B5, B4, and executive paper sizes.  
Manual two-sided printing can support all sizes and more types of media.  
(Transparencies, envelopes, and labels are not supported.)  
If both automatic and manual two-sided printing are enabled in the software driver, the  
printer will automatically print on two sides if the size and type are supported by the  
duplexer. Otherwise, it will manually duplex.  
ENWW  
Two-sided (duplex) printing  
99  
   
For best results, avoid two-sided printing with rough-textured, heavy-weight media.  
When duplexing preprinted media such as letterhead or forms, load the paper the  
opposite of that when duplexing simplex. Place the media face down in Trays 2, 3, 4, or  
5. Place special media face up in Tray 1. (This process is different than the process for  
one-sided printing.)  
Control panel settings for automatic two-sided printing  
Many software applications allow you to change two-sided printing settings. If your software  
application or printer driver does not allow you to adjust two-sided printing settings, you can  
adjust these settings through the control panel. The factory default setting is OFF.  
Do not use two-sided printing when printing on labels. Serious damage to the printer may  
result.  
CAUTION  
Note  
To enable or disable two-sided printing from the printer control panel  
Changing settings for two-sided printing through the printer control panel affects all print  
jobs. Whenever possible, change settings for two-sided printing through your software  
application or printer driver.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to select Printing....  
5. Press to highlight DUPLEX.  
6. Press to select DUPLEX.  
100 Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
   
7. Press or to select ON to enable two-sided printing or OFF to disable two-sided  
printing.  
8. Press to set the value.  
9. Press to highlight DUPLEX BINDING.  
10. Press to select DUPLEX BINDING.  
11. Press MENU.  
12. Select two-sided printing from your software application or printer driver, if possible.  
To select two-sided printing from the printer driver, the driver must first be properly  
configured. (For instructions, see the online Help for the printer driver.)  
Note  
Duplexing blank pages  
If selecting source or type in the software driver, the printer will not print blank second sides  
of duplexed pages, resulting in faster performance. However, if the paper type is set to ANY  
TYPE, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, or PREPUNCHED, the blank second sides print to  
prevent text from printing on the wrong side of the page.  
Options for binding two-sided printing jobs  
Before printing a two-sided document, in the printer driver choose the edge on which you will  
bind your finished document. Long-edge or book binding is the conventional layout used in  
book binding. Short-edge or tablet binding is the typical calendar binding.  
The default binding setting is to bind on the long edge when the page is set up for portrait  
Note  
orientation. To change to short edge binding, click the Flip Pages Up check box.  
Manual two-sided (duplex) printing  
Printing on both sides can be performed manually (manual duplex printing). This is useful for  
paper sizes or weights that are not supported for automatic duplexing (for example,  
cardstock or custom size paper). It can also be performed on printer models that do not  
support automatic two-sided printing.  
Damaged or previously used paper can cause paper jams and should not be used.  
Note  
Note  
Manual two-sided printing is not supported for Windows 98 and NT 4.0 systems that use the  
PS driver.  
To manually print on two sides (duplex)  
1. Ensure that the printer driver is configured to allow manual duplexing. In the printer  
driver, select Allow Manual Duplex. See Accessing the printer drivers.  
2. From the application, open the printer driver.  
3. Select the appropriate size and type.  
4. On the Finishing tab, click Print on Both Sides or Print on Both Sides (Manually).  
5. The default binding option is to bind on the long edge of the paper in portrait layout. To  
change the setting, click the Finishing tab, and select the Flip pages up checkbox.  
6. Click OK. The Print on Both Sides instructions will appear. Follow the instructions to  
finish printing your document.  
ENWW  
Two-sided (duplex) printing 101  
         
If total sheets exceed the Tray 1 capacity for manual duplex jobs, feed the top 100 sheets  
and press . When prompted, feed the next 100 sheets and press . Repeat as necessary  
until all the sheets from the output stack have been loaded into Tray 1.  
Note  
Printing booklets  
Some versions of the printer driver let you control the printing of booklets when duplexing.  
You can select binding on the left or right side on letter, legal, or A4 paper size. Windows  
2000 and XP supports booklet printing for all paper sizes.  
See the printer driver online Help for more information about the printing booklets feature.  
Adjusting the registration  
Adjusting the registration ensures that all jobs are centered on the page. This is a two-part  
process: 1) estimating the centering adjustments and 2) setting the shift values.  
Use the following procedure to estimate the centering adjustments.  
1. Using a ruler, measure, in millimeters, the left and right margins on the front side of the  
printed test page. Compare the two measurements.  
2. Estimate the adjustment necessary to center the page. Each unit of adjustment shifts the  
image approximately 0.25 mm. This is the X1 shift value.  
3. Using a ruler, measure, in millimeters, the left and right margins on the back side of the  
printed test page. Compare the two measurements.  
4. Estimate the adjustment necessary to center the page. Each unit of adjustment shifts the  
image approximately 0.25 mm. This is the X2 shift value.  
5. Using a ruler, measure, in millimeters, the top and bottom margins on the printed test  
page. Compare the two measurements.  
6. Estimate the adjustment necessary to center the page. Each unit of adjustment shifts the  
image approximately 0.25 mm. This is the Y shift value.  
Use the following procedure to set the shift values.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press or to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE and press to select.  
3. Press or to highlight PRINT QUALITY and press to select.  
4. Press or to highlight SET REGISTRATION and press to select.  
5. Press or to highlight the tray you are adjusting. (ADJUST TRAY <N>, ADJUST  
TRAY 1, ADJUST TRAY 2, ADJUST TRAY 3, or ADJUST TRAY 4), and press to  
select.  
6. Press or to highlight ADUST TRAY X and press to select.  
7. Press or to highlight X1 SHIFT and press to select.  
8. Press or to highlight the value for X1 from Step 2 and press to select.  
9. Press or to highlight X2 SHIFT and press to select.  
10. Press or to highlight the value for X2 in Step 4 and press to select.  
11. Press or to highlight Y SHIFT and press to select.  
102 Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
     
12. Press or to highlight the value for Y from Step 6 and press to select.  
These procedures may be repeated for each of the trays installed in the printer.  
ENWW  
Two-sided (duplex) printing 103  
Special printing situations  
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of paper.  
Printing a different first page  
Use the following procedure to print the first page of a document on a different paper type  
than the rest of the document, for example, to print the first page of a document on  
letterhead paper and the rest on plain paper.  
1. From your application or printer driver, specify a tray for the first page and another tray  
for the remaining pages.  
For more information about how to access the printer drivers, see Accessing the printer  
2. Load the special paper into the tray that you specified in step 1.  
3. Load the paper for the remaining pages of the document into another tray.  
You can also print on different paper by using the printer control panel or printer driver to set  
the types of paper that are loaded in the trays and then selecting the first and remaining  
pages by paper type.  
Printing a blank back cover  
Use the following procedure to print a blank back cover. You can also select an alternate  
paper source or print on a different media type than the rest of the document.  
1. On the printer driver’s Paper tab, select Use different paper, then from the drop-down  
list, select Back Cover, check Add a blank back cover, and then click OK.  
2. For more information about how to access the printer drivers, see Accessing the printer  
You can also select an alternate paper source or print a blank back cover on a different  
media type than the rest of the document. If desired, select a different source and type from  
the drop-down lists.  
Printing on custom-size media  
The printer supports single-sided printing and manual duplexing on custom-size paper.  
Tray 1 supports paper sizes from 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to 312 x 470 mm (12.3 x 18.5  
inches). Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4 and 5 support media sizes from 148 x 210 mm (7.16  
x 8.27 inches) to 297 x 432 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
When printing on custom-size paper, if Tray 1 is configured in the printer control panel as  
TRAY 1 TYPE=ANY and TRAY 1 SIZE=ANY, the printer will print on whatever paper is  
loaded in the tray. When printing on custom size paper from Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5, adjust the  
switch on the tray to the Custom position, and from the control panel, set the paper size to  
CUSTOM or ANY CUSTOM.  
Some software applications and printer drivers allow you to specify custom paper-size  
dimensions. Be sure to set the correct paper size in both the page setup and print dialog  
boxes. If your software does not allow this, specify the custom paper-size dimensions in the  
Paper handling menu of the printer control panel. See Paper handling menu for more  
information.  
104 Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
             
The printer feeder supports up to 312 mm wide, but the printer driver is limited to 304 mm.  
Note  
If your software application requires you to calculate margins for custom-size paper, see the  
online Help for that application.  
Stopping a print request  
You can stop a print request either from the printer control panel or from your software  
application. To stop a print request from a computer on a network, see the online Help for  
the specific network software.  
It may take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job.  
Note  
To stop the current print job from the printer control panel  
1. Press STOP on the printer control panel to pause the job that is currently printing. The  
control panel menu provides the option to resume printing or to cancel the current job.  
2. Press MENU to exit the menu and resume printing, or highlight CANCEL JOB, and press  
to cancel the job.  
Pressing STOP does not affect subsequent print jobs that are stored in the printer buffer.  
To stop the current print job from your software application  
A dialog box may appear briefly on the user display, giving you the option to cancel the print  
job.  
If several requests have been sent to the printer through your software, they might be  
waiting in a print queue (for example, in Windows Print Manager). See the software  
documentation for specific instructions on canceling a print request from the computer.  
If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler (Windows 98,  
2000, XP, or Me), delete the print job there.  
For Windows 98, 2000, XP, or Me, click Start, Settings, and then Printers. Double-click the  
HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer icon to open the print spooler. Select the print job  
you want to cancel, and then press Delete.  
Job storage features  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer lets you store a job in the printer’s memory for  
printing at a later time. The job storage features use memory from both the hard drive and  
random access memory (RAM). These job storage features are described below.  
To support job storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print  
PostScript (PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install  
additional memory. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage  
features, such as quick copying.  
ENWW  
Job storage features 105  
     
To use the Private Job and Proof and Hold features, you must have a minimum of 192 MB of  
memory: 160 MB DDR plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board. To use the  
quick copy and stored jobs features you must install an optional hard drive in the printer  
(HP Color LaserJet 5550, 5550n, 5550dn, 5550dtn models) and properly configure the  
drivers.  
Note  
Make sure to uniquely identify jobs in the printer driver before printing. Using default names  
may override previous jobs with the same default name or cause the job to be deleted. For  
more information about how to access the printer drivers, see Accessing the printer drivers.  
CAUTION  
Storing a print job  
You can download a print job to the printer without printing it. You can then print the job at  
any time through the printer control panel. For example, you may want to download a  
personnel form, calendar, time sheet, or accounting form that other users can access and  
print.  
To store a print job permanently, select the Stored Job option in the driver when printing the  
job.  
1. Press MENU to enter MENUS.  
2. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.  
3. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.  
4. Press to highlight your USER NAME.  
5. Press to select your USER NAME.  
6. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.  
7. Press to select the JOB NAME.  
PRINT is highlighted.  
8. Press to select PRINT.  
9. Press or to select the first digit of the PIN.  
10. Press to select the digit. The number changes to an asterisk.  
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for the remaining three digits of the PIN.  
12. Press when finished entering PIN.  
13. Press or to select the number of copies needed.  
14. Press to print the job.  
Quick copying a job  
Quick Copy stores a copy of a printed job on the hard drive, and allows you to print  
additional copies of a print job using the control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs  
that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel.  
This feature can be turned on or off from the driver.  
1. Press MENU to enter MENUS.  
2. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.  
3. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.  
4. Press to highlight your USER NAME.  
106 Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
       
5. Press to select your USER NAME.  
6. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.  
7. Press to select the JOB NAME.  
PRINT is highlighted.  
8. Press to select PRINT.  
9. Press or to select the number of copies.  
10. Press to print the job.  
Proofing and holding a job  
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a  
job and then print additional copies. This option stores the print job on the printer hard drive  
or in printer RAM memory, and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the  
first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job  
from the printer control panel. The number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in  
the printer is set from the printer control panel.  
To permanently store the job and prevent the printer from deleting it, select the Stored Job  
option in the driver.  
Printing stored jobs  
1. Press MENU to enter MENUS.  
RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.  
2. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.  
3. Press to highlight your USER NAME.  
4. Press to select your USER NAME.  
5. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.  
6. Press to select the JOB NAME.  
PRINT is highlighted.  
7. Press to select PRINT.  
8. Press or to select the number of copies.  
9. Press to print the job.  
Deleting stored jobs  
When you send a stored job, the printer overwrites any previous jobs with the same user and  
job name. If there is not a job already stored under the same user and job name, and the  
printer needs additional space, the printer may delete other stored jobs starting with the  
oldest. The default number of jobs that can be stored is 32. You can change the number of  
jobs that can be stored from the control panel. For more information about setting the job  
storage limit, see System setup menu.  
If the printer is turned off, all stored jobs are deleted. A job can also be deleted from the  
control panel, from the embedded Web server, or from HP Web Jetadmin. To delete a job  
from the control panel, use the following procedure:  
1. Press MENU to enter MENUS.  
ENWW  
Job storage features 107  
       
2. RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.  
3. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.  
4. Press to highlight your USER NAME.  
5. Press to select your USER NAME.  
6. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.  
7. Press to select the JOB NAME.  
8. Press to highlight DELETE.  
9. Press to select DELETE.  
10. Press to delete the job.  
Private jobs  
This option allows you to send a print job directly to the printer memory. Selection of Private  
Job activates the PIN field. The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN in the  
printer control panel. After the job is printed, the printer removes the job from the printer  
memory. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that  
you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. Private Job stores the print job on the  
hard drive or in printer RAM memory. After it is released for printing, the private job is  
immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed, you have to reprint the job  
from the program. If you send a second private job to the printer with the same user name  
and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for  
printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are  
deleted if power to the printer is turned off.  
A lock symbol next to a job name indicates that the job is private.  
Note  
Specify that a job is private from the driver. Select the Private Job option and type a 4-digit  
PIN. To avoid overwriting jobs with the same name, also specify a username and job name.  
Printing a private job  
1. Press MENU to enter MENUS.  
RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.  
2. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.  
3. Press to highlight your USER NAME.  
4. Press to select your USER NAME.  
5. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.  
6. Press to select the JOB NAME.  
PRINT is highlighted.  
7. Press to select PRINT.  
8. Press or to select the first digit of the PIN.  
9. Press to select the digit. The number changes to an asterisk.  
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 for the remaining three digits of the PIN.  
11. Press when finished entering PIN.  
12. Press or to select the number of copies.  
108 Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
     
13. Press to print the job.  
Deleting a private job  
A private job can be deleted from the printer control panel. You can delete a job without  
printing it, or IT WILL BE AUTOMATICALLY DELETED after it is printed.  
1. Press MENU to enter MENUS.  
RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted.  
2. Press to select RETRIEVE JOB.  
3. Press to highlight your USER NAME.  
4. Press to select your USER NAME.  
5. Press to highlight a JOB NAME.  
6. Press to select the JOB NAME.  
7. Press to highlight DELETE.  
8. Press to select DELETE.  
9. Press or to select the first digit of the PIN.  
10. Press to select the digit. The number changes to an asterisk.  
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for the remaining three digits of the PIN.  
12. Press when finished entering PIN.  
13. Press to delete the job.  
Mopier mode  
When Mopier Mode is enabled in the driver, the printer produces multiple, collated copies  
from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases printer performance and  
reduces network traffic by sending the job to the printer once, then storing it in the printer’s  
RAM. The remainder of the copies are printed at the printer’s fastest speed. All documents  
can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the desktop, which eliminates the  
extra step of using a photocopier.  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printers support the mopying feature, provided they have  
enough total memory (at least 192 MB of total memory: 160 MB DDR plus 32 MB on the  
formatter board), and the mopying feature is enabled by default if the Mopier Mode setting  
is Enabled in the Device Settings tab.  
ENWW  
Job storage features 109  
   
Managing memory  
This printer supports up to 544 MB of memory: 512 MB DDR plus 32 MB of additional  
memory on the formatter board. You can add additional memory by installing dual data-rate  
(DDR) memory. To allow for memory expansion, the printer has two DDR slots, which  
accept 128 or 256 MB of RAM each. For information about installing memory, see Working  
Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printers use 200-pin small outline dual  
inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM.  
Note  
Note  
The printer features Memory Enhancement Technology (MEt), which automatically  
compresses page data to provide the most efficient use of the printer’s RAM.  
The printer uses DDR SODIMM. Extended data output (EDO) DIMMs are not supported.  
If memory problems occur when you are printing complex graphics, you can make more  
memory available by removing downloaded fonts, style sheets, and macros from printer  
memory. Reducing the complexity of a print job from within an application can help avoid  
memory problems.  
110 Chapter 4 Printing tasks  
ENWW  
   
Managing the printer  
This chapter describes how to manage the printer. The following topics are covered:  
ENWW  
111  
 
Printer information pages  
From the printer control panel, you can print pages that give details about the printer and its  
current configuration. The procedures for printing the following information pages are  
described here:  
menu map  
configuration page  
supplies status page  
usage page  
demo page  
print RGB and CMYK samples  
file directory (available only on printers with hard drives)  
PCL or PS font list  
event log  
Menu map  
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the control panel, print a  
control panel menu map.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. If PRINT MENU MAP is not highlighted, press or until it is highlighted.  
5. Press to select PRINT MENU MAP.  
The message Printing... MENU MAP appears on the display until the printer finishes  
printing the menu map. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the menu map.  
You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference. The content of the  
menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer. (Many of these  
values can be overridden from the printer driver or software application.)  
For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see Menu hierarchy.  
Configuration page  
Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer  
problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper  
trays, and printer languages.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.  
5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.  
112 Chapter 5 Managing the printer  
ENWW  
         
The message PRINTING STOPPED appears on the display until the printer finishes printing  
the configuration page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration  
page.  
If the printer is configured with EIO cards (for example, an HP Jetdirect print server) or an  
optional hard drive, an additional configuration page will print that provides information about  
those devices.  
Note  
Supplies status page  
The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies:  
print cartridges (all colors)  
transfer unit  
fuser  
To print the supplies status page:  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.  
5. Press to select PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.  
The message Printing... SUPPLIES STATUS appears on the display until the printer  
finishes printing the supplies status page. The printer returns to the Ready state after  
printing the supplies status page.  
If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page will not show the remaining life  
for those supplies. For more information, see Non-HP print cartridges.  
Note  
Usage page  
The usage page lists a page count for each size of paper that has passed through the  
printer. This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side, the  
number that were printed on two sides (duplexed), and totals of the two printing methods for  
each paper size. It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each color.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT USAGE PAGE.  
5. Press to select PRINT USAGE PAGE.  
The message Printing... USAGE PAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes  
printing the usage page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the usage page.  
ENWW  
Printer information pages 113  
       
Demo  
A demo page is a color photograph that demonstrates print quality.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT DEMO.  
5. Press to select PRINT DEMO.  
The message Printing... DEMO PAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes  
printing the demo page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page.  
Print CMYK samples  
Use the PRINT CMYK SAMPLES page to print CMYK color samples to match the color  
values in your application.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES.  
5. Press to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES.  
The message Printing... CMYK Samples appears on the display until the printer finishes  
printing the demo page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page.  
Print RGB samples  
Use the PRINT RGB SAMPLES page to print RGB color samples to match the color values  
in your application.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT RGB SAMPLES.  
5. Press to select PRINT RGB SAMPLES.  
The message Printing... RGB Samples appears on the display until the printer finishes  
printing the demo page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page.  
File directory  
The file directory page contains information for all installed mass storage devices. This  
option does not appear if no mass storage devices are installed.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
114 Chapter 5 Managing the printer  
ENWW  
         
4. Press to highlight PRINT FILE DIRECTORY.  
5. Press to select PRINT FILE DIRECTORY.  
The message Printing... FILE DIRECTORY appears on the display until the printer finishes  
printing the file directory page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the file  
directory page.  
PCL or PS font list  
Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the printer. (The font lists also  
show which fonts are resident on an optional hard disk accessory or flash DIMM.)  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST.  
5. Press to select PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST.  
The message Printing... FONT LIST appears on the display until the printer finishes printing  
the font list page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the font list page.  
Event log  
The event log lists the printer events, including printer jams, service errors, and other printer  
conditions.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.  
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG.  
5. Press to select PRINT EVENT LOG.  
The message Printing... EVENT LOG appears on the display until the printer finishes  
printing the event log. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log.  
ENWW  
Printer information pages 115  
     
Using the embedded Web server  
When the printer is directly connected to a computer, the embedded Web server is  
supported for Windows 98 and later. In order to use the embedded Web server with a direct  
connection, you must choose the Custom installation option when you install the printer  
driver. Select the option to load Printer Status and Alerts. The proxy server is installed as  
part of the Printer Status and Alerts software.  
When the printer is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically  
available. You may access the embedded Web server from Windows 95 and later.  
The embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network status and to manage  
printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel. Below are  
examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server:  
view printer control status information  
set the type of paper loaded in each tray  
determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones  
view and change tray configurations  
view and change the printer control panel menu configuration  
view and print internal pages  
receive notification of printer and supplies events  
view and change network configuration  
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 and later or  
Netscape Navigator 4 and later. The embedded Web server works when the printer is  
connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based  
printer connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the  
embedded Web server. For more information about the HP embedded Web server, see the  
HP Embedded Web Server User's Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included  
with this printer.  
To access the embedded Web server using a network  
connection  
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address for the printer. (To find  
the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a  
configuration page, see Printer information pages.)  
Once you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.  
Note  
1. The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about  
the printer: the Information tab, the Settings tab, and the Network tab. Click the tab that  
you want to view.  
2. See the following sections for more information about each tab.  
116 Chapter 5 Managing the printer  
ENWW  
     
Information tab  
The Information pages group consists of the following pages.  
Device Status. This page displays the printer status and shows the life remaining of  
HP supplies, with 0 percent representing that a supply is empty. The page also shows  
the type and size of print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click  
Change Settings.  
Configuration page. This page shows the information found on the printer  
Configuration page.  
Supplies Status. This page shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent  
representing that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To  
order new supplies, click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the  
window. To visit any website, you must have Internet access.  
Event log. This page shows a list of all printer events and errors.  
Usage page. This page shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has  
printed, grouped by size and type.  
Device Information. This page also shows the printer network name, address, and  
model information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings  
tab.  
Control Panel. Displays messages from the printers control panel, for example Ready  
or POWERSAVE.  
Settings tab  
This tab allows you to configure the printer from your computer. The Settings tab can be  
password protected. If this printer is networked, always consult with the printer administrator  
before changing settings on this tab.  
The Settings tab contains the following pages.  
Configure Device. Configure all printer settings from this page. This page contains the  
traditional menus found on printers using a control panel display. These menus include  
Information, Paper Handling, Configure Device, and Diagnostics.  
Alerts. Network only. Set up to receive e-mail alerts for various printer and supplies  
events.  
E-mail. Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and  
outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.  
Security. Set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and  
Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the EWS.  
Other Links. Add or customize a link to another website. This link is displayed in the  
Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages. These permanent links always  
appear in the Other Links area: HP Instant Support™, Order Supplies, and Product  
Support.  
Device Information. Name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name  
and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer.  
Language. Determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server  
information.  
Time Services. Allows time synchronization with a network time server.  
ENWW  
Using the embedded Web server 117  
   
Networking tab  
This tab allows the network administrator to control network-related settings for the printer  
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab will not appear if the printer is directly  
connected to a computer, or if the printer is connected to a network using anything other  
than an HP Jetdirect print server card.  
Other links  
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. You must have Internet access in  
order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when  
you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these  
websites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.  
HP Instant Support™. Connects you to the HP website to help you find solutions. This  
service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide  
diagnostic and support information specific to your printer.  
Order Supplies. Click this link to connect to the HP website and order genuine  
HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.  
Product Support. Connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series  
printer. Then, you can search for help regarding general topics.  
118 Chapter 5 Managing the printer  
ENWW  
   
Using the HP Toolbox  
The hp Toolbox is a Web application that you can use for the following tasks:  
Check the printer status.  
Configure the printer settings (access device Web page settings).  
View troubleshooting information.  
View online documentation.  
Print internal printer information pages.  
Receive pop-up status messages.  
You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer. If the  
printer is connected to a network, use Custom Installer. The HP Toolbox software is  
automatically installed as part of the typical software installation.  
You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Toolbox. However, if you  
click a link in the Other Links area, you must have Internet access to go to the site  
associated with the link. See Other links for more information.  
Note  
Supported operating systems  
HP Toolbox is supported for the following operating systems:  
Windows 98, 2000, Me, Server 2003, and XP  
Macintosh OS 10.2 or later  
Supported browsers  
To use the HP Toolbox, you must have one of the following browsers:  
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Internet Explorer 5.2 or later for Macintosh)  
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later (Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later for Macintosh)  
Opera Software ASA Opera™ 6.05 and 7.0 for Windows  
Safari 1.0 software for Macintosh  
All pages can be printed from the browser.  
To view HP Toolbox  
On the Start menu, select Programs, select HP Color LaserJet 5550, and then select  
HP LaserJet toolbox.  
You can also view the HP Toolbox by clicking the system tray icon or the desktop icon.  
The HP Toolbox opens in a Web browser.  
Note  
Note  
Once you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.  
ENWW  
Using the HP Toolbox 119  
         
HP Toolbox sections  
The HP Toolbox software contains the following sections:  
Other links  
Each page in the HP Toolbox contains links to the HP website for the following information:  
Product registration  
Product support  
Ordering supplies  
HP Instant Support™  
You must have Internet access to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and  
did not connect when you first opened the HP Toolbox, you must connect before you can  
visit these websites.  
Status tab  
The Status tab has links to the following main pages:  
Device Status. View printer status information. This page will indicate printer conditions  
such as a paper jam or an empty tray. Use the virtual control panel buttons on this page  
to change printer settings. After you correct a problem with the printer, click the Refresh  
button to update the device status.  
Supplies Status. View detailed supplies status such as the percent of toner remaining  
in the print cartridges and the number of pages printed with the current print cartridges.  
This page also has links to order supplies and to find recycling information.  
Print Info Pages. Print the configuration page and various other information pages that  
are available for the printer, such as the Supplies Status page, the Demo page, and  
Menu Map.  
Troubleshooting tab  
The Troubleshooting tab provides links to various printer troubleshooting information, such  
as how to clear a paper jam, how to resolve print quality problems, how to resolve other  
internal problems with the printer, and how to print some printer pages.  
120 Chapter 5 Managing the printer  
ENWW  
       
Alerts tab  
The Alerts tab allows you to configure the printer to automatically notify you of printer alerts.  
The Alerts tab has links to the following main pages:  
Set up status alerts  
Administrative settings  
Set up status alerts page  
On the Set up status alerts page, you can choose to turn alerts on or off, specify when the  
printer should send an alert, and choose from two different types of alerts:  
a pop-up message  
a task bar icon  
Click Apply to activate the settings.  
Administrative settings page  
On the Administrative settings page, you can set the frequency of how often the  
HP Toolbox checks for printer alerts. Three settings are available:  
Less often: every 15000 milliseconds  
Normal: every 8000 milliseconds  
More often: every 4000 milliseconds  
If you want to reduce network I/O traffic, reduce the frequency that the printer checks for  
alerts.  
Documentation tab  
The Documentation tab contains links to these information sources:  
User Guide. Contains the information about the printer usage, warranty, specifications,  
and support that you are currently reading. The user guide is available in both HTML  
and PDF format.  
Install Notes. Contains installation information about the printer.  
Device Settings button  
Clicking the Device Settings button connects you to the printer’s embedded Web server.  
See Using the embedded Web server for more information.  
HP Toolbox links  
The HP Toolbox links at the left of the screen provide links to the following options:  
Select a device. Select from all HP Toolbox-enabled devices.  
View current alerts. View the current alerts for all set up printers. (You must be printing  
to view current alerts.)  
Text only page. View HP Toolbox as a site map linking to text-only pages.  
ENWW  
Using the HP Toolbox 121  
       
122 Chapter 5 Managing the printer  
ENWW  
Color  
This chapter describes how the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer provides great color  
printing. This chapter also describes ways to produce the best possible color prints. The  
following topics are covered:  
ENWW  
123  
 
Using color  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer offers great color printing as soon as you set up  
the printer. It provides a combination of automatic color features to generate excellent color  
results for the general office user, plus sophisticated tools for the professional who is  
experienced with color use.  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer provides carefully designed and tested color  
tables to provide smooth, accurate color rendition of all printable colors.  
Paper selection  
For the best color and image quality it is important to select the appropriate paper type from  
the software printer menu or from the front panel. See Selecting print media.  
HP ImageREt 3600  
HP ImageREt 3600 print technology is a system of innovative technologies developed  
exclusively by HP to deliver superior print quality. The HP ImageREt system sets itself apart  
from the industry by integrating technology advancements and optimizing each element of  
the print system. Several categories of HP ImageREt have been developed for a variety of  
user needs.  
The system’s foundation is comprised of key color laser technologies, including image  
enhancements, smart supplies, and high-resolution imaging. As the level or category of  
ImageREt increases, these core technologies are refined for more advanced system usage,  
and additional technologies are integrated. The HP ImageREt 3600 is a complete  
HP proprietary printing solution developed and implemented for the HP Color LaserJet 5550  
series printer. HP now offers superior image enhancements for general office documents  
and marketing collateral. HP Image REt 3600 does well in different environmental conditions  
and with a variety of media. The image mode of this print system is optimized for printing on  
HP High Gloss Laser Paper.  
Best image printing  
For the best image quality from the HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer, use HP High  
Gloss Laser Paper in the special imaging mode. To select the image mode, set the media  
type to HP High Gloss (Images). See Printing on special media for more information.  
Color options  
Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents.  
Color options use object tagging, which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used  
for different objects (text, graphics, and photos) on a page. The printer driver determines  
which objects are used on a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best  
print quality for each object. Object tagging, combined with optimized default settings,  
produces great color out of the box.  
In the Windows environment, the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab  
in the printer driver.  
For more information about accessing the printer drivers, see Accessing the printer drivers.  
124 Chapter 6 Color  
ENWW  
             
sRGB  
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a world-wide color standard originally developed by  
HP and Microsoft as a common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners, digital  
cameras), and output devices (printers, plotters). It is the default color space used for  
HP products, Microsoft operating systems, the World Wide Web, and most office software  
sold today. sRGB is representative of the typical Windows PC monitor today and the  
convergence standard for high-definition television.  
Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room lighting can affect the appearance  
of colors on your screen. For more information, see Matching colors.  
Note  
The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop, CorelDRAW™, Microsoft Office, and many other  
applications use sRGB to communicate color. Most importantly, as the default color space in  
Microsoft operating systems, sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange  
color information between applications and devices using a common definition that assures  
typical users will experience greatly improved color matching. sRGB improves your ability to  
match colors between the printer, the PC monitor and other input devices (scanner, digital  
camera) automatically, without the need to become a color expert.  
Printing in four-colors (CMYK)  
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK) are the inks used by a printing press. The  
process is often called four-color printing. CMYK data files are typically used by and  
originate from graphic arts (printing and publishing) environments. The printer will accept  
CMYK colors through the PS printer driver. The printer color-rendering of CMYK is designed  
to provide rich, saturated colors for text and graphics.  
CMYK ink set emulation (PostScript only)  
The printer’s color rendering of CMYK can be made to emulate several standard Offset  
Press ink sets.  
Default. This selection is good for general purpose rendering of CMYK data. It is  
designed to render photographs well, while at the same time providing rich saturated  
colors for text and graphics.  
Specification for Web Offset Publications (SWOP). Common ink standards in  
the United States and other locations.  
Euroscale. Common ink standard in Europe and other locations.  
Dainippon Ink and Chemical (DIC). Common ink standard in Japan and other locations.  
Device. Emulation is turned off. To render photographs properly with this selection,  
images require color management in the application or operating system.  
ENWW  
Using color 125  
     
Managing printer color options  
Setting color options to Automatic will typically produce the best possible print quality for  
color documents. However, there may be cases when you want to print a color document in  
grayscale (black and white) or wish to change one of the printer's color options.  
Using Windows, print in grayscale or change the color options using settings found on  
the Color tab in the printer driver.  
Using a Macintosh computer, print in grayscale or change the color options using the  
Color Matching pop-up menu in the Print dialog box.  
For more information about accessing the printer drivers, see Accessing the printer drivers.  
Print in Grayscale  
Selecting the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver prints a document in black  
and white. This option is useful for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.  
Automatic or manual color adjustment  
The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment,  
halftones, and edge enhancements used for each element in a document. For more  
information, see your printer driver online Help.  
Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents.  
Note  
The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color treatment,  
halftones, and edge enhancements for text, graphics and photographs. To access the  
Manual color options, from the Color tab, select Manual, then Settings.  
Manual color options  
Manual color adjustment allows you to adjust the Color (or Color Map) and Halftoning  
options individually for text, graphics, and photographs.  
Some applications convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases, the  
Note  
Photographs settings will also control text and graphics.  
Halftone options. Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You  
can select halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The two  
halftone options are Smooth and Detail.  
The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also  
enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when  
uniform and smooth area fills are top priority.  
The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among  
lines or colors, or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this  
option when sharp edges and details are top priority.  
Neutral Grays. The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray  
colors used in text, graphics, and photographs.  
126 Chapter 6 Color  
ENWW  
             
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:  
Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) using only black toner. This  
guarantees neutrals colors without a color cast.  
4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors.  
This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it  
produces the darkest black.  
Edge Control. The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control  
has three components: adaptive halftoning REt, and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases  
edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by overlapping  
the edges of adjacent objects slightly. The color REt option increases the apparent  
resolution by placing each dot for the smoothest edges.  
Four levels of edge control are available:  
Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning is on for this  
setting.  
Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive  
halftoning and color REt is on.  
Light sets trapping at a minimal level, and adaptive halftoning and color REt is on.  
Off turns off trapping, adaptive halftoning, and color REt.  
RGB Color. Two values are available for the RGB Color setting:  
Default instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB. sRGB is the accepted  
standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization (www).  
Vivid instructs the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones so that colored  
objects appear more colorful. Printed blues and greens will likely appear darker than on  
your monitor. This option is good for business graphics or for producing colors similar to  
the HP Color LaserJet 4550.  
Device instructs the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render  
photographs properly with this selection, you must manage image color in the  
application or operating system.  
HP Color LaserJet 4550 series Color Emulation can be accessed though the Print Task  
Quick Sets in the printer driver.  
Note  
ENWW  
Managing printer color options 127  
Matching colors  
The process of matching printer output color to your computer screen is quite complex  
because printers and computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors  
display colors by light pixels using an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers print  
colors using a CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) process.  
Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor.  
These factors include:  
print media  
printer colorants (inks or toners for example)  
printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology for example)  
overhead lighting  
personal differences in perception of color  
software applications  
printer drivers  
computer operating system  
monitors  
video cards and drivers  
operating environment (humidity for example)  
Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your  
printed colors.  
For most users, the best method for matching colors on your screen to your printer is to print  
sRGB colors.  
PANTONE®* color matching  
PANTONE®* has multiple color matching systems. PANTONE®* Matching System is very  
popular and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints. See  
http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550_software for details on how to use PANTONE®*  
Matching System with this printer.  
Sample book color matching  
The process for matching printer output to preprinted sample books and standard color  
references is complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a sample  
book if the inks used to create the sample book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These  
are usually referred to as process color sample books.  
Some sample books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created  
colorants. Many of these spot colors are outside of the gamut of the printer. Most spot color  
sample books have companion process sample books that provide CMYK approximations to  
the spot color.  
Most process sample books will have a note on what process standards were used to print  
the sample book. In most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color  
matching to the process sample book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the  
printer menu. If you cannot identify the process standard, use SWOP ink emulation.  
128 Chapter 6 Color  
ENWW  
         
Printing color samples  
To use the Color samples, select the Color sample that is the closest match to the desired  
color. Use the sample’s color value in your application to describe the object you wish to  
match. Colors may vary depending on paper type and the software application used. For  
more details on how to use the Color Samples, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550.  
Use the following procedure to print color samples at the printer using the control panel:  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES or PRINT RGB SAMPLES.  
5. Press to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES or PRINT RGB SAMPLES.  
These samples are only accurate if you have not changed the defaults.  
Note  
Color emulation of the HP Color LaserJet 4550  
The PCL, PS, and HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer drivers include a Print Task Quick  
Set called "HP Color LaserJet 4550 Color Emulation." This Print Task Quick Set allows you  
to easily set the printer to emulate the colors of the HP Color LaserJet 4550 printer. In  
general, the emulation color rendering has more contrast and is darker in appearance. This  
emulation works well with documents that contain graphics.  
ENWW  
Matching colors 129  
   
130 Chapter 6 Color  
ENWW  
Maintenance  
This chapter describes ways to maintain your printer. The following topics are covered:  
ENWW  
131  
 
Managing the print cartridge  
Be sure to use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results. This section provides  
information on proper use and storage of HP print cartridges. It also provides information  
about using non-HP print cartridges.  
HP print cartridges  
When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge (part number C9730A, C9731A, C9732A,  
C9733A), you can obtain the following supplies information:  
percentage of supplies remaining  
estimated number of pages remaining  
number of pages printed  
Non-HP print cartridges  
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or  
remanufactured. Because they are not genuine HP products, HP cannot influence their  
design or control their quality. Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP print  
cartridge will not be covered under the printer warranty.  
If you use a non-HP print cartridge, certain features, such as remaining toner volume data,  
may not be available.  
If the non-HP print cartridge was sold to you as a genuine HP product, see HP fraud hotline.  
Print cartridge authentication  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printer automatically authenticates the print cartridges  
when the cartridges are inserted into the printer. During authentication, the printer will let you  
know if a cartridge is or is not a genuine HP print cartridge.  
If the printer control panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and  
you believe you purchased an HP print cartridge, call the HP fraud hotline.  
To override a non-HP print cartridge error message, press the button.  
HP fraud hotline  
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) when you install an  
HP print cartridge and the printer message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help  
determine if the product is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.  
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:  
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.  
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the orange pull tab is  
missing, or the packaging differs from HP packaging).  
132 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
                   
Print cartridge storage  
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.  
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few  
minutes.  
CAUTION  
Print cartridge life expectancy  
The life of the print cartridge depends on usage patterns and the amount of toner that print  
jobs require. Usage conditions and print patterns may cause actual results to vary.  
At any time, you can verify the life expectancy by checking the toner level, as described  
below.  
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies  
The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control  
panel messages that prompt when to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns  
may cause results to vary.  
Item  
Printer message  
Page count  
Approximate time  
period1  
13,000 pages2  
12,000 pages2  
Color cartridges  
REPLACE BLACK  
CARTRIDGE  
3.25 months  
3 months  
REPLACE <COLOR>  
CARTRIDGE  
Image Transfer kit  
Image Fuser kit  
REPLACE  
TRANSFER KIT  
120,000 pages  
40 months  
50 months  
REPLACE FUSER KIT 150,000 pages  
1 Approximate life is based on 4,000 pages per month.  
2 Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on approximately 5 percent  
coverage of individual colors.  
To order supplies online, go to http://www.hp.com/supplies/clj5550.  
You can use the HP Toolbox or the embedded Web server to order supplies. For more  
ENWW  
Managing the print cartridge 133  
           
Checking the print cartridge life  
You can check the print cartridge life using the printer control panel, the embedded Web  
server, printer software, or HP Web Jetadmin software. Check the supplies gauge on the  
printer control panel for approximate supply levels.  
Printer display  
1
2
3
4
Message area  
Prompt area  
Supplies gauge  
Print cartridge colors from left to right: black, magenta, yellow, and cyan  
For precise levels, follow the instructions below to print a supplies status page.  
Using the printer control panel  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.  
5. Press to print the supplies status page.  
Using the embedded Web server (for network connected printers)  
1. In your browser, enter the IP address for the printer home page. This takes you to the  
printer status page. See Using the embedded Web server.  
2. On the left side of the screen click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies  
status page, which provides print cartridge information.  
Using printer software  
To use this feature, the HP Toolbox software must be installed on your computer. This  
software is automatically installed as part of the typical software installation. In addition, you  
must have access to the World Wide Web.  
1. On the Start menu, select Programs, and then click HP toolbox.  
The HP Toolbox opens in a Web browser.  
2. On the left side of the window, click the Status tab, and then click Supplies Status.  
134 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
     
If you want to order supplies, click Order Supplies. This opens a browser that produces a  
URL from which to purchase supplies. Select the supplies you wish to order and follow the  
directions accordingly.  
Note  
Using HP Web Jetadmin  
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the printer device. The device status page shows print cartridge  
information.  
Changing print cartridges  
When a print cartridge approaches the end of useful life, the control panel displays a  
message recommending that you order a replacement. The printer can continue to print  
using the current print cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to  
replace the cartridge.  
The printer uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K),  
magenta (M), yellow (Y), and cyan (C).  
Replace a print cartridge when the printer control panel displays a REPLACE <COLOR>  
CARTRIDGE message. The control panel display also indicates the color that should be  
replaced (unless a genuine HP cartridge is not currently installed).  
If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot  
water sets toner into fabric.  
CAUTION  
Note  
For information about recycling used print cartridges, see HP Printing Supplies Returns and  
Recycling Program Information, or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies website at  
To change the print cartridge  
1. Lift the top cover of the printer.  
ENWW  
Changing print cartridges 135  
       
2. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
3. Grasp the green handles on the transfer unit and pull down.  
Do not place any item on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is damaged,  
severe print quality problems may result.  
CAUTION  
4. Remove the used print cartridge from the printer.  
136 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
5. Remove the new print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag  
for recycling.  
6. Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge  
from side to side.  
7. Remove the orange mylar strip and the orange shipping lock from the new print  
cartridge. Discard the lock.  
ENWW  
Changing print cartridges 137  
8. Remove the inside sealing tape by breaking the orange tab on the end of the new print  
cartridge and pulling the tape completely out. Discard the tape.  
9. Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is  
completely seated and clicks into place.  
If a cartridge is in the wrong slot, the control panel will display the message INCORRECT  
Note  
<COLOR> CARTRIDGE or INCORRECT SUPPLIES.  
10. Close the front cover and then close the top cover. After a short while, the control panel  
should display Ready.  
11. Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new  
cartridge arrived. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.  
12. If you are using a non-HP print cartridge, check the control panel for further instructions.  
For additional help, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550.  
138 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
Replacing supplies  
When you use genuine HP supplies, the printer automatically notifies you when supplies are  
nearly depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies  
before they need to be replaced.  
Locating supplies  
Supplies are identified by labeling and blue plastic handles.  
The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item.  
Supply item locations  
1
2
3
fuser  
print cartridges  
transfer unit  
Supply replacement guidelines  
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting  
up the printer.  
Sufficient space is required above and in the front of the printer for removing supplies.  
The printer should be located on a flat, sturdy surface.  
For instructions on installing supplies, see the installation guides provided with each supply  
item or see more information at http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550. When you connect,  
select Solve a Problem.  
Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of HP products in this printer. Use of non-HP  
products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard  
warranty or service agreements.  
CAUTION  
ENWW  
Replacing supplies 139  
     
Making room around the printer for replacing supplies  
The following illustration shows the clearance necessary in front of, above, and to the side of  
the printer for replacing supplies.  
Supplies replacement clearance diagram  
1
2
3
628 mm (25 inches)  
1550 mm (61 inches)  
940 mm (37 inches)  
140 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
 
Configuring e-mail alerts for supplies status  
You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the embedded Web server to configure the system to  
alert you of problems with the printer. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-  
mail account(s) that you specify.  
You can configure the following:  
the printer(s) you want to monitor  
what alerts are to be received (for example, alerts for paper jams, paper out, supplies  
status, and cover open)  
the e-mail account to which the alerts should be forwarded  
Software  
HP Web Jetadmin  
Information location  
See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for  
details on alerts and how to set them up.  
Embedded Web server  
general information about the embedded Web  
server.  
See the embedded Web server Help system for  
details on alerts and how to set them up.  
You can also receive alerts through the HP Toolbox software. These alerts display as either  
a pop-up window or an animated taskbar icon. The HP Toolbox software does not send  
alerts in the form of an e-mail message. You can configure the HP Toolbox software to  
deliver only the alerts you want to receive, and you can also specify how often the software  
checks the printer’s status. See Using the HP Toolbox for more information.  
ENWW  
Configuring e-mail alerts for supplies status 141  
   
Periodic cleaning  
To ensure the printer continues to function properly throughout its life, periodic cleaning is  
necessary.  
One area of the printer that must be cleaned periodically is the overhead transparency  
(OHT) and two-sided printing (duplex) sensor. The OHT sensor detects and ensures that the  
printer uses the correct print mode. The sensor also corrects for paper skew on the second  
side of the page during two-sided (duplex) printing.  
The static discharge comb at the top of the printer also needs periodic cleaning. A brush to  
clean the static discharge comb is stored inside the front cover.  
When to clean the OHT sensor  
The printer control panel reports paper is being used instead of the desired transparency.  
The images on the front and back of the printed page do not align.  
To clean the OHT sensor  
If these instructions do not remedy the OHT and two-sided printing (duplex) problems,  
contact HP support at http://www.hp.com/support.  
Note  
1. Lift the top cover of the printer.  
2. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
142 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
     
3. Grasp the green handles on the transfer unit and pull down.  
4. Remove the cyan print cartridge from the printer.  
Do not place the cyan print cartridge on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is  
damaged, severe print quality problems may result.  
CAUTION  
5. Remove the OHT sensor cleaning brush from the base of the printer.  
6. Insert the brush into the base notch and brush from right to left four or five times.  
Do not brush back and forth over the sensor. This will smear dust over the sensor and cause  
printer errors.  
CAUTION  
7. Replace the OHT sensor cleaning brush into the base of the printer.  
8. Align the cyan print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge  
until it is completely seated.  
ENWW  
Periodic cleaning 143  
9. Close the front cover, and then close the top cover.  
144 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
When to clean the static discharge comb  
Clean the static discharge comb when you replace the black print cartridge, when you  
replace the image transfer kit, or when print quality defects occur.  
If you are replacing the black print cartridge, clean the static discharge comb first and then  
replace the black print cartridge. (Toner might fall onto the black print cartridge during  
cleaning.) Be careful not to get toner on your clothes  
Note  
If you are replacing the image transfer kit, clean the static discharge comb with the new  
cleaning brush included with the replacement image transfer kit.  
ENWW  
When to clean the static discharge comb 145  
 
To clean the static discharge comb  
1. Lift the top cover of the printer.  
2. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
3. Remove the cleaning brush from inside the front cover.  
146 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
 
4. Grasp the green handles on the ETB and pull down.  
5. Rub the cleaning brush back and forth three times over the static discharge comb at the  
top of the printer to remove excess toner. Shake the brush over a waste receptacle to  
dispose of the excess toner.  
ENWW  
To clean the static discharge comb 147  
6. Close the ETB and store the cleaning brush inside the front cover. If you are replacing  
the ETB, a new cleaning brush is included.  
7. Close the front cover and then the top cover.  
148 Chapter 7 Maintenance  
ENWW  
Basic troubleshooting checklist  
If you are experiencing problems with the printer, this checklist may help identify the cause  
of the problem.  
Is the printer connected to power?  
Is the printer on?  
Is the printer in the Ready state?  
Are all necessary cables connected?  
Are any messages displayed on the control panel?  
Was a genuine HP supply installed?  
Were recently replaced print cartridges installed correctly? Was the pull tab on the  
cartridge removed?  
Were recently installed supply items (image fuser kit, image transfer kit) installed  
correctly?  
If you cannot find solutions to printer problems in this guide, see http://www.hp.com/support/  
For additional information on installation and setup of the printer, see the start guide for this  
printer.  
Factors affecting printer performance  
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job. Among these is maximum printer speed,  
measured in pages per minute (ppm). Other factors that affect printing speed include the use  
of special paper (such as transparencies, heavy paper, and custom-size paper), printer  
processing time, and download time. Other factors include:  
the complexity and size of graphics  
the printer I/O configuration (network versus parallel)  
the speed of the computer you are using  
the amount of printer memory installed  
the network operating system and configuration (if applicable)  
printer personality (PCL or PostScript 3 emulation)  
Adding additional printer memory might resolve memory problems, improve how the printer  
handles complex graphics, and improve download times, but it will not increase maximum  
printer speed (ppm rating).  
Note  
ENWW  
Basic troubleshooting checklist 151  
     
Troubleshooting information pages  
From the printer control panel, you can print pages that can help diagnose printer problems.  
The procedures for printing the following information pages are described here:  
paper path test page  
registration page  
event log  
Paper path test page  
The paper path test page is useful for testing the paper handling features of the printer. You  
can define the paper path you want to test by selecting the source, destination, and other  
options available on the printer.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.  
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.  
4. Press to highlight PAPER PATH TEST.  
5. Press to select PAPER PATH TEST.  
The message Performing... PAPER PATH TEST appears on the display until the printer  
finishes the paper path test. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the paper  
path test page.  
Registration page  
The registration page prints a horizontal arrow and a vertical arrow that show how far from  
center an image can be printed on the page. You can set registration values for a tray so  
that an image on the back and front of a page is centered. Setting the registration also  
allows the image to be centered on the page. Image placement varies slightly for each tray.  
Perform the registration procedure for each tray.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.  
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.  
6. Press to highlight SET REGISTRATION.  
7. Press to select SET REGISTRATION.  
You can select a tray by specifying a SOURCE. The default SOURCE is Tray 2. To set the  
Note  
registration for Tray 2, go to step 12. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.  
8. Press to highlight SOURCE.  
9. Press to select SOURCE.  
10. Press or to highlight a tray.  
152 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
           
11. Press to select the tray.  
After selecting the tray, the printer control panel returns to the SET REGISTRATION  
menu.  
12. Press to highlight PRINT TEST PAGE.  
13. Press to select PRINT TEST PAGE.  
14. Follow the instructions on the printed page.  
Event log  
The event log lists the printer events, including printer jams, service errors, and other printer  
conditions.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.  
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG.  
5. Press to select PRINT EVENT LOG.  
The message Printing... EVENT LOG appears on the display until the printer finishes  
printing the event log. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log.  
ENWW  
Troubleshooting information pages 153  
 
Control panel message types  
Control panel messages are divided into three types, depending on their severity.  
Status messages  
Warning messages  
Error messages  
Within the error message category, some messages are ranked as Critical error messages.  
This section explains the differences between the control panel message types.  
Status messages  
Status messages reflect the current state of the printer. They inform you of normal printer  
operation and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the printer  
changes. Whenever the printer is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages,  
the status message Ready is displayed if the printer is online.  
Warning messages  
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate  
with the Ready or Status messages and remain displayed until the button is pressed. If  
CLEARABLE WARNINGS is set to JOB in the printer’s configuration menu, these  
messages are cleared by the next print job.  
Error messages  
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or  
clearing a paper jam.  
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If AUTO CONTINUE=ON is displayed, the  
printer will continue normal operation after displaying an auto-continuable error message for  
10 seconds.  
Any button pressed during the 10-second display of an auto-continuable error message will  
override the auto-continue feature and the function of the button pressed will take  
precedence. For example, pressing the MENU button will cancel the job.  
Note  
Critical error messages  
Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be  
cleared by turning the printer off and then on. These messages are not affected by the  
AUTO CONTINUE setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.  
The following table lists and describes control panel messages, in numerical and  
alphabetical order.  
154 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
         
Control panel messages  
Control panel messages  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
10.X.X SUPPLY  
MEMORY ERROR  
alternates with  
The printer cannot read or write to at  
least one print cartridge memory tag or  
at least one memory tag is missing.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
2.  
Press for more information.  
3. If the error persists, contact  
HP support at http://www.hp.com/  
The following control panel messages  
correspond to the color of the print  
cartridge:  
For help press  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
10.00.00 = black print cartridge  
10.00.01 = cyan print cartridge  
10.00.02 = magenta print cartridge  
10.00.03 = yellow print cartridge  
13.XX.YY JAM IN  
DUPLEX PATH  
For help press  
There is a jam in the duplex path.  
There is a jam in the media path.  
There is a jam in the top cover area.  
1.  
Press for detailed information  
about clearing the jam.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
3. If the message persists after  
clearing all pages, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
13.XX.YY JAM IN  
PAPER PATH  
1.  
Press for detailed information  
about clearing the jam.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
For help press  
3. If the message persists after  
clearing all pages, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
13.XX.YY JAM IN  
TOP COVER AREA  
For help press  
1.  
Press for detailed information  
about clearing the jam.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
3. If the message persists after  
clearing all pages, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 155  
   
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
13.XX.YY JAM IN  
TRAY 1  
A page is jammed in the multi-purpose  
tray.  
1.  
Press for detailed information  
about clearing the jam.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
Clear jam then  
press  
3. If the message persists after  
clearing all pages, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
alternates with  
13.XX.YY JAM IN  
TRAY 1  
For help press  
13.XX.YY JAM IN  
TRAY X  
A page is jammed in Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5, or 1.  
in multiple trays.  
Press for detailed information  
about clearing the jam.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
For help press  
3. If the message persists after  
clearing all pages, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
13.XX.YY MULTIPLE  
JAMS IN DUPLEX PATH  
For help press  
There is a jam in the duplex path.  
1.  
Press for detailed information  
about clearing the jam.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
3. If the message persists after  
clearing all pages, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
13.XX.YY MULTIPLE  
JAMS IN PAPER PATH  
For help press  
There are multiple jams in the paper path. 1.  
Press for detailed information  
about clearing the jam.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
3. If the message persists after  
clearing all pages, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY  
For help press  
The printer has received more data from  
the computer than fits in available  
memory.  
1. Press to continue printing.  
Note  
alternates with  
A loss of data will occur.  
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY  
To continue press  
2. Reduce the complexity of the print  
job to avoid this error in the future.  
3. Adding memory to the printer may  
allow printing of more complex  
pages.  
156 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
22 EIO X  
The printer’s EIO card in slot X has  
overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy  
state.  
1. Press to continue printing.  
BUFFER OVERFLOW  
To continue press  
Note  
A loss of data will occur.  
2. If the message persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
22 PARALLEL I/O  
BUFFER OVERFLOW  
For help press  
The printer’s parallel buffer has  
overflowed during a busy state.  
1. Press to resume printing.  
Note  
A loss of data will occur.  
alternates with  
2. If the message persists, disconnect  
the parallel cable at both ends and  
reconnect.  
22 PARALLEL I/O  
BUFFER OVERFLOW  
To continue press  
3. If the message still persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
22 SERIAL I/O  
The printer’s serial buffer has overflowed 1. Press to continue printing.  
during a busy state.  
BUFFER OVERFLOW  
To continue press  
Note  
A loss of data will occur.  
2. If the message persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
22 USB I/O  
The printer’s USB buffer has overflowed  
during a busy state.  
1. Press to continue printing.  
BUFFER OVERFLOW  
To continue press  
Note  
Loss of data will occur.  
2. If the message persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
40 BAD SERIAL  
TRANSMISSION  
To continue press  
A serial data error (parity, framing, or  
line overrun) has occurred while the  
printer was receiving data.  
1. Press to continue printing.  
Note  
A loss of data will occur.  
2. If the message persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
40 EIO X BAD  
A connection with the card in EIO slot X  
has been abnormally broken.  
1. Press to continue printing.  
TRANSMISSION  
To continue press  
Note  
A loss of data will occur.  
2. If the message persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 157  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
41.3 UNEXPECTED  
SIZE IN TRAY X  
For help press  
Media is loaded that is longer or shorter  
in the feed direction than the size  
configured for the tray.  
1. If the incorrect size was selected,  
cancel the job or press to access  
help.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
41.3 UNEXPECTED  
SIZE IN TRAY X  
For help press  
alternates with  
LOAD TRAY X  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To use another  
tray press  
Media is loaded that is longer or shorter  
in the feed direction than the size  
configured for the tray.  
1. If the incorrect size was selected,  
cancel the job or press to access  
help.  
OR  
2. Press to select another tray.  
3. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
41.5 UNEXPECTED  
TYPE IN TRAY X  
For help press  
The printer senses a different media  
type in the media path than configured in  
the tray.  
1. If the incorrect size was selected,  
cancel the job or press to access  
help.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
41.5 UNEXPECTED  
TYPE IN TRAY X  
For help press  
alternates with  
LOAD TRAY X  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To use another  
tray press  
The printer senses a different media  
type in the media path than configured in  
the tray.  
1. If the incorrect size was selected,  
cancel the job or press to access  
help.  
OR  
2. Press to select another tray.  
3. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
41.X  
A printer error has occurred.  
1.  
Press to continue or press for  
more information.  
PRINTER ERROR  
For help press  
alternates with  
41.X  
2. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
3. If the message still persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue press  
49.XXXX  
A critical firmware error has occurred.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
2. If the message persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
turn off then on  
158 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
50.X FUSER ERROR  
For help press  
A fuser error has occurred.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
The following are specific fuser errors:  
2. If the message persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
50.1 - A low fuser temperature error has  
occurred in the main thermistor.  
50.2 - A fuser warm-up service error has  
occurred.  
50.3 - A high fuser temperature error has  
occurred in the main thermistor.  
50.4 - A faulty fuser error has occurred.  
50.8 - A low fuser temperature error has  
occurred in the sub-thermistor.  
50.9 - A high fuser temperature error has  
occurred in the sub-thermistor.  
These errors may be due to an  
inadequate power supply, inadequate  
line voltage, or a problem with the fuser.  
51.2Y  
Either a beam detects an error, or a  
laser error has occured.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
For help press  
alternates with  
51.2Y  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
The values of Y are:  
Y Description  
0 - Black  
1 - Cyan  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
2 - Magenta  
3 - Yellow  
turn off then on  
53.XX.X CHECK RAM  
DIMM SLOT X  
An error occurred on some memory of  
the printer.  
If prompted to do so, press to  
continue. The printer should come to the  
Ready state, but will not make full use of  
all memory installed.  
Values of X, Y, and ZZ are:  
X Device Location  
1 Slot 1  
Otherwise:  
1. Turn the printer off.  
2 Slot 2  
2. Verify that all DDR SDRAM meets  
specifications and is correctly seated.  
Y Bank Number  
3. Turn the printer on.  
1 Bank number 1  
4. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
2 Bank number 2  
3 Bank number 3  
4 Bank number 4  
ZZ Error Number  
01 Unsupported memory  
02 Unrecognized memory  
03 Under minimum memory limit  
04 Exceeded maximum memory limit  
05 Failed RAM test  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 159  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
54.01  
Printing cannot continue. The humidity  
environmental sensor is abnormal.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
turn off then on  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
54.XX  
Printing cannot continue. There is a  
toner remaining sensor malfunction.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
turn off then on  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
Values of X are:  
15 - Yellow  
16 - Magenta  
17 - Cyan  
18 - Black  
55 DC CONTROLLER  
ERROR  
A printer command error has occurred.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
For help press  
alternates with  
55.0X.YY  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
turn off then on  
56.XX  
A printer error has occurred.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
turn off then on  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
57.0X  
A printer fan error has occurred.  
A memory tag error was detected.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
turn off then on  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
58.0X  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
For help press  
alternates with  
58.0X  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
turn off then on  
160 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
59.XY  
A printer motor error has occurred.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
For help press  
alternates with  
59.XY  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
Note: This message might also  
appear if the transfer unit is missing  
or incorrectly installed. Ensure that  
the transfer unit is correctly installed.  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
turn off then on  
62 NO SYSTEM  
To continue  
No system was found.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
turn off then on  
68.X PERMANENT  
STORAGE FULL  
For help press  
A non-volatile storage device is full.  
Pressing the button should clear the  
message. Printing can continue, but  
there may be unexpected behavior.  
1. Press to continue.  
2. For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off  
and then back on.  
3. If a 68.0 error persists, contact  
X Description  
alternates with  
HP Support.  
0 for onboard NVRAM  
1 for removable disk (flash or hard)  
68.X PERMANENT  
STORAGE FULL  
To continue press  
4. For 68.1 errors, use the HP Web  
Jetadmin software to delete files  
from the disk drive.  
5. For 68.1 errors that persist, contact  
HP Support.  
68.X PERMANENT  
STORAGE WRITE FAIL  
To continue press  
A non-volatile storage device is full.  
Pressing the button should clear the  
message. Printing can continue, but  
there may be unexpected behavior.  
1. Press to continue.  
2. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
3. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
X Description  
0 for onboard NVRAM  
1 for removable disk (flash or hard)  
68.X STORAGE ERROR  
SETTINGS CHANGED  
For help press  
One or more printer settings saved in the 1. Press to continue.  
non-volatile storage device is invalid and  
2. If the message persists, turn the  
has been reset to its factory default.  
Pressing the button should clear the  
message. Printing can continue, but  
there may be unexpected behavior.  
printer off and then back on.  
3. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
alternates with  
68.X STORAGE ERROR  
SETTINGS CHANGED  
To continue press  
79.XXXX  
A critical hardware error has occurred.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
PRINTER ERROR  
To continue  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
turn off then on  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 161  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
8X.YYYY  
The EIO accessory card in slot X has  
encountered a critical error.  
1. Turn the printer off and then back on.  
EIO ERROR  
2. If the problem persists, contact  
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/  
X Description  
1: error in slot 1  
2: error in slot 2  
Access Denied  
An attempt has been made to modify a  
menu item while the control panel  
security mechanism is enabled by the  
printer administrator. The message will  
disappear shortly, and the printer will  
return to Ready or BUSY state.  
Contact the printer administrator to  
change settings.  
MENUS LOCKED  
BAD OPTIONAL TRAY  
CONNECTION  
The 500-sheet input tray is not making  
proper connection with the printer.  
1. Verify that the printer is on a level  
surface.  
2. Turn the printer off.  
3. Reseat the printer on the 500-sheet  
input tray.  
4. If the printer is on the optional  
printer stand, make sure that the  
support straps are attached to the  
rear of the stand and printer.  
5. Turn the printer on after reseating  
the 500-sheet input tray.  
Calibrating...  
Canceling...  
The printer is calibrating.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
The printer is in the process of canceling  
a job. The message will continue to be  
displayed while the job is stopped, the  
paper path flushed, and any remaining  
incoming data on the active data  
channel is received and discarded.  
CARD SLOT X  
The flash card in slot X is not working  
correctly.  
1. Turn the printer off.  
NOT FUNCTIONAL  
2. Remove the card from the slot  
indicated and replace with a new  
card.  
Checking paper path  
Checking printer  
The engine is turning its rollers to check  
for possible paper jams.  
No action necessary.  
The engine is doing an internal test.  
No action necessary.  
CHOSEN PERSONALITY  
NOT AVAILABLE  
To continue press  
alternates with  
PJL encountered a request for a  
personality that did not exist in the  
printer. The job is aborted and no pages  
will be printed.  
1.  
Press for detailed information.  
2. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
3. Reprint using the correct driver for  
the device.  
CHOSEN PERSONALITY  
NOT AVAILABLE  
For help press  
162 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
Clearing event log  
This message is displayed while the  
event log is cleared. The printer will exit  
the MENUS once the event log has been  
cleared.  
No action necessary.  
Clearing paper path  
The printer jammed or detected  
misplaced paper when turned on. The  
printer is attempting to eject jammed  
pages automatically.  
No action necessary.  
CLOSE FRONT COVERS  
For help press  
The covers need to be closed.  
Close front covers.  
Note  
This message might also appear if the  
fuser is missing or incorrectly installed.  
Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed.  
DATA RECEIVED  
To print last page press  
alternates with  
The printer received data and is waiting  
for a form feed. When the printer  
receives another file, the message  
should disappear.  
Press to continue printing.  
Ready  
To print last page press  
Deleting...  
The printer is currently deleting the  
stored job.  
No action necessary.  
DISK DEVICE  
FAILURE  
A device failure has occurred on the  
specified drive. Printing may continue for  
jobs that do not require access to the  
disk drive.  
1. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
2. If the message persists, remove and  
re-install the EIO disk drive.  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
3. Turn the printer back on.  
4. If the message still persists, replace  
the EIO disk drive.  
DISK FILE  
The printer received a PJL file system  
command that attempted to perform an  
illogical operation (for example, to  
download a file to a non-existent  
directory). Printing may continue.  
1. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
OPERATION FAILED  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
2. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
3. If the message reappears, there  
may be a problem with the software  
application.  
DISK FILE  
The printer received a PJL file system  
command that attempted to store  
something on the file system but was  
unsuccessful because the file system is  
full.  
1. Use the HP Web Jetadmin software  
to delete files from the EIO disk  
drive, or delete the stored job from  
the printer control panel.  
SYSTEM IS FULL  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
2. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
3. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 163  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
DISK IS  
The file system device is protected and  
no new files can be written to it.  
1. To enable writing to the disk, turn off  
write protection, using HP Web  
Jetadmin.  
WRITE PROTECTED  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
2. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
3. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
EIO DISK X  
The EIO disk in slot X is not working  
correctly.  
1. Turn the printer off.  
NOT FUNCTIONAL  
For help press  
2. Remove the EIO disk from the slot  
indicated and replace with a new  
EIO disk drive.  
EIO X disk  
initializing  
The EIO disk device in slot X is initializing. No action necessary.  
EIO X disk  
The EIO disk device in slot X is spinning  
up its platter.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
spinning up  
Event Log Empty  
SHOW EVENT LOG was selected from  
the control panel, and the event log is  
empty.  
FLASH DEVICE  
FAILURE  
A device failure has occurred on the  
specified drive. Printing may continue for  
jobs that do not require the Flash DIMM.  
1. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
2. If the message persists, remove and  
re-install the EIO disk drive.  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
3. Turn the printer back on.  
4. If the message still persists, replace  
the Flash DIMM.  
FLASH FILE  
The printer received a PJL file system  
command that attempted to perform an  
illogical operation (for example, to  
download a file to a non-existent  
directory).  
1. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
OPERATION FAILED  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
2. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
3. If the message reappears, there  
may be a problem with the software  
application.  
FLASH FILE  
SYSTEM IS FULL  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
The printer received a PJL file system  
command that attempted to store  
something on the file system but was  
unsuccessful because the file system is  
full.  
1. Use HP Web Jetadmin software to  
delete files from the Flash Memory  
and try again.  
2. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
3. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
164 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
FLASH IS  
The file system device is protected and  
no new files can be written to it.  
1. To enable writing to the Flash  
Memory, turn off write protection,  
using HP Web Jetadmin.  
WRITE PROTECTED  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
2. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
3. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
Genuine HP supplies installed  
A new HP cartridge has been installed.  
The printer returns to the Ready state  
after approximately 10 seconds.  
No action necessary.  
If no paper in tray:  
MANUALLY FEED  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
For help press  
alternates with  
A job was sent that specified MANUAL  
FEED and Tray 1 is empty.  
Load Tray 1 with the specified media.  
OR  
To use media from another tray, press  
and select the tray from the list.  
MANUALLY FEED  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To use another  
tray press  
Incorrect  
The wrong PIN was entered. After three  
incorrect PIN entries, the printer will  
return to Ready.  
Re-enter PIN correctly.  
INCORRECT <COLOR>  
CARTRIDGE  
A cartridge is installed in the wrong slot  
and the cover is closed.  
1. Open the top cover and image  
transfer unit.  
alternates with  
CAUTION  
For help press  
The image transfer unit can be  
easily damaged.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
2. Remove the incorrect print cartridge.  
3. Install the correct print cartridge.  
4. Close the front cover.  
INCORRECT SUPPLIES  
For status press  
At least one supply item is incorrectly  
positioned in the printer and another  
supply item is missing, incorrectly  
placed, out, or low.  
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES  
STATUS menu.  
2. Press and to highlight the  
specific supply that has a problem.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
3.  
Press to view help for the supply.  
4. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
Initializing  
Displayed when the printer is turned on  
to show that permanent storage is being  
initialized.  
No action necessary.  
permanent storage  
Initializing...  
This message is displayed when the  
printer is turned on, as soon as the  
individual tasks begin initialization.  
No action necessary.  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 165  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
INSERT OR CLOSE  
TRAY X  
Tray XX must be inserted or closed  
before the current job can be printed.  
Close the tray indicated.  
For help press  
INSTALL <COLOR>  
CARTRIDGE  
The cartridge is either not installed or not 1. Open the top cover and image  
correctly installed in the printer.  
transfer unit.  
CAUTION  
alternates with  
The image transfer unit can be  
easily damaged.  
For help press  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
2. Insert the print cartridge and make  
sure that it is fully seated.  
3. Close the front cover.  
4. If the error persists, contact  
HP support at http://www.hp.com/  
INSTALL SUPPLIES  
For status press  
At least one supply item is missing or is  
not correctly seated in the printer and  
another supply item is missing,  
incorrectly placed, out, or low. Insert the  
supply item or make sure the installed  
supply item is fully seated.  
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES  
STATUS menu.  
2. Press and to highlight the  
specific supply that has a problem.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
3.  
Press to view help for the supply.  
4. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY  
TO LOAD FONTS/DATA  
For help press  
The device does not have enough  
memory to load the data, such as fonts  
or macros from the location specified.  
<DEVICE> can be one of the following:  
1. To use the device without the data,  
press  
.
2. To solve the problem, add more  
memory to the device. DDR  
SDRAM Memory: 128MB, (Q2630A)  
or 256MB (Q2631A).  
INTERNAL = ROM directly on the  
formatter board  
alternates with  
<DEVICE>  
CARD SLOT X = font card in slot X  
DIMMS  
To continue press  
EIO X DISK = removable hard disk  
installed in EIO slot X  
LOAD TRAY 1:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
For help press  
alternates with  
Tray 1 is loaded and configured for a  
type and size other than the one  
specified in the job.  
1. If the correct paper is loaded, press  
.
2. Otherwise, remove the incorrect  
paper and load Tray 1 with the  
specified paper.  
3. Confirm that the media guides are in  
the correct position.  
LOAD TRAY 1:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To continue press  
4. Verify that the tray switch is in the  
correct position.  
5. To use another tray, remove paper  
from Tray 1 and then press  
.
166 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
LOAD TRAY X  
Tray XX is either empty or configured for  
a type and size other than specified in  
the job.  
1. Load the paper tray with the  
specified media.  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
For help press  
2. Confirm that the media guides are in  
the correct position.  
alternates with  
3. Verify that the tray switch is in the  
correct position.  
LOAD TRAY X  
4. To use another tray, press  
.
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To use another tray press  
LOAD TRAY X  
Tray XX is either empty or configured for  
a type and size other than specified in  
the job. The size specified in the job  
requires that the tray switch be in the  
CUSTOM position.  
1. Load the paper tray with the  
specified media.  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
2. Confirm that the media guides are in  
the correct position.  
Move tray switch to CUSTOM  
alternates with  
3. Verify that the tray switch is in the  
CUSTOM position.  
LOAD TRAY X  
4. To use another tray, press  
.
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To use another tray press  
LOAD TRAY XX:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
For help press  
Tray XX is either empty or configured for  
a type and size other than specified in  
the job. No other tray is available.  
1. Load the paper tray with the  
specified media.  
2. Confirm that the media guides are in  
the correct position.  
3. Verify that the tray switch is in the  
correct position.  
LOAD TRAY XX:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
Tray XX is either empty or configured for  
a type and size other than specified in  
the job. The size specified in the job  
requires that the tray switch be in the  
CUSTOM position.  
1. Load the paper tray with the  
specified media.  
2. Confirm that the media guides are in  
the correct position.  
Move tray switch to CUSTOM  
alternates with  
3. Verify that the tray switch is in the  
CUSTOM position.  
No other tray is available.  
LOAD TRAY XX:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
For help press  
LOAD TRAY XX:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
Tray XX is either empty or configured for  
a type and size other than specified in  
the job. The size specified in the job is a  
detectable size.  
1. Load the paper tray with the  
specified media.  
2. Confirm that the media guides are in  
the correct position.  
Recommend move switch to  
STANDARD  
No other tray is available.  
3. Verify that the tray switch is in the  
STANDARD position so the printer  
will automatically detect the size.  
alternates with  
LOAD TRAY XX:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
For help press  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 167  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
LOAD TRAY XX:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
Tray XX is either empty or configured for  
a type and size other than specified in  
the job. The size specified in the job is a  
detectable size.  
1. Load the paper tray with the  
specified media.  
2. Confirm that the media guides are in  
the correct position.  
Recommend move switch to  
STANDARD  
3. Verify that the tray switch is in the  
STANDARD position so the printer  
will automatically detect the size.  
alternates with  
LOAD TRAY XX:  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To use another tray press  
Loading  
Programs and fonts can be stored on the No action necessary. Do not turn the  
printer’s file system and are loaded into  
RAM when the printer is turned on. The  
number XX specifies a sequence  
number indicating the current program  
being loaded.  
printer off.  
program XX  
Do not power off  
MANUALLY FEED  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
For help press  
A job was sent specifying MANUAL  
FEED and Tray 1 is empty.  
Load Tray 1 with the specified media.  
No other tray is available.  
MANUALLY FEED  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
For help press  
A job was sent that specified MANUAL  
FEED. Tray 1 is already loaded.  
Load Tray 1 with the specified media.  
OR  
If the corrected paper is loaded in Tray  
1, press to print.  
alternates with  
To use media from another tray, clear  
the media from Tray 1, and then press  
MANUALLY FEED  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To continue press  
.
MANUALLY FEED  
OUTPUT STACK  
The even-numbered pages of a manual  
two-sided document have been printed  
and the printer is waiting for the output  
stack to be inserted for the odd-  
Follow the instructions on the Print on  
Both Sides instruction dialog box at the  
computer.  
OR  
numbered pages to be printed.  
Press for help at the printer.  
Moving solenoid  
To exit press  
The printer is executing a Component  
Test and the component selected is a  
solenoid.  
No action necessary.  
the STOP key  
NO STORED JOBS  
No jobs stored on the EIO disk. This  
message is displayed when the user  
enters the RETRIEVE JOB menu and  
there are no jobs to retrieve.  
No action necessary.  
168 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
NON HP SUPPLY  
DETECTED  
A new cartridge has been installed that  
is not made by HP. This message is  
displayed until an HP cartridge is  
installed or the button is pressed.  
If you believe you purchased an  
HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud  
hotline at (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in  
North America).  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
CAUTION  
Any printer repair required as a result of  
using non-HP cartridges is not covered  
under HP warranty.  
To continue printing, press  
.
NON HP SUPPLY  
IN USE  
The printer has detected that a non-  
HP print cartridge is currently installed.  
If you believe you purchased an  
HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud  
hotline.  
alternates with  
Ready  
CAUTION  
Any printer repair required as a result of  
using non-HP cartridges is not covered  
under HP warranty.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges, but the level of any  
refilled cartridge will not be shown.  
ORDER <COLOR>  
CARTRIDGE  
The identified print cartridge is nearing  
the end of its useful life. The printer is  
ready and will continue for the estimated  
number of pages indicated. Estimated  
pages remaining is based upon the  
historical page coverage of this printer.  
1.  
Press to view help for the  
message.  
2. Obtain the part number for the print  
cartridge indicated.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
3. Order a print cartridge  
Printing will continue until a supply  
needs to be replaced.  
alternates with  
Note  
Ready  
Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
server for more information.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
ORDER FUSER KIT  
LESS THAN X PAGES  
For help press  
alternates with  
The fuser is near end of life. The printer  
is ready and will continue for the  
estimated number of pages indicated.  
1.  
Press to view help for the  
message.  
2. Obtain the part number for the fuser  
kit.  
Printing will continue until a supply  
needs to be replaced.  
3. Order the fuser kit.  
Ready  
Note  
Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
server for more information.  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 169  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
ORDER SUPPLIES  
alternates with  
Ready  
More than one supply item is low.  
1. Press MENU to access the MENUS.  
Printing will continue until a supply  
needs to be replaced.  
2. Press or to highlight  
INFORMATION, and then press  
.
3. Press or to highlight  
For help press  
SUPPLIES STATUS, and then  
press  
.
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
4. Press or to highlight a supply  
that needs to be ordered.  
5.  
Press to access help for the  
supply.  
6. Obtain a part number from help.  
7. Order the supply.  
8. Repeat the previous steps as  
necessary for each supply that  
needs to be ordered.  
9. Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
Web server for more information.  
ORDER TRANSFER KIT  
LESS THAN X PAGES  
For help press  
The transfer unit is near end of life.  
1.  
Press to view help for the  
message.  
Printing can continue until transfer unit  
life ends.  
2. Obtain the transfer kit part number  
from help.  
alternates with  
3. Order the transfer kit.  
Ready  
Note  
Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
server for more information.  
Output Bin Full  
Remove all paper  
from bin  
The output bin is full and must be  
emptied for printing to continue.  
Remove media from the output bin.  
Paused  
The printer is paused, and there are no  
error messages pending at the display.  
The I/O continues receiving data until  
memory is full.  
Press the STOP key.  
To return to Ready  
press the STOP key  
Performing  
upgrade  
A firmware upgrade is in process.  
Do not turn the printer off until the printer  
returns to Ready.  
Performing...  
The printer is performing a Paper Path  
Test.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
PAPER PATH TEST  
Performing...  
The printer is performing a Print/Stop  
Test.  
PRINT/STOP TEST  
170 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
Please wait  
The printer is in the process of clearing  
data.  
No action necessary.  
Powersave on  
The printer is in the power save mode.  
Any button press, an error condition, or  
the receipt of printable data may clear  
this message.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
PRINT  
The printer is generating the  
configuration page. The printer will  
return to the online Ready state when  
the page is completed.  
CONFIGURATION  
PRINTING STOPPED  
To continue press  
This message is displayed when a Print/  
Stop Test is run and time expires.  
Press to continue printing.  
No action necessary.  
Printing...  
This message displays while the printer  
CMYK samples page is being generated.  
CMYK Samples  
Printing...  
The printer is generating the demo page. No action necessary.  
The printer will return to the online  
Ready state when the page is completed.  
DEMO PAGE  
Printing...  
The printer is generating the event log  
page. The printer will return to the online  
Ready state when the page is completed.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
EVENT LOG  
Printing...  
The printer is generating the mass  
storage directory page. The printer will  
return to the Ready state when the page  
is completed.  
FILE DIRECTORY  
Printing...  
The printer is generating either the PCL  
or PS personality typeface list. The  
printer will return to the Ready state  
when the page is completed.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
FONT LIST  
Printing...  
The printer is generating the printer  
menu map. The printer will return to the  
Ready state when the page is completed.  
MENU MAP  
Printing...  
The printer is generating the print quality Follow the instructions on the printed  
troubleshooting pages. The printer will  
return to the Ready state when the  
pages are printed.  
pages.  
PQ troubleshooting  
Printing...  
The printer is generating the registration  
page. The printer will return to the SET  
REGISTRATION menu when the page  
is completed.  
Follow the instructions on the printed  
pages.  
REGISTRATION PAGE  
Printing...  
This message displays while the printer  
RGB samples page is being generated.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
RGB Samples  
Printing...  
The printer is generating the supplies  
status page. The printer will return to the  
online Ready state when the page is  
completed.  
SUPPLIES STATUS  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 171  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
Printing...  
The printer is generating the usage  
No action necessary.  
page. The printer will return to the online  
Ready state when the page is completed.  
USAGE PAGE  
Processing duplex  
job  
Paper temporarily comes into the output  
bin while printing a duplex job. Do not  
attempt to remove the pages until the job will disappear when the job is finished.  
is complete.  
Do not grab paper as it temporarily  
comes into the output bin. The message  
Do not grab paper  
until job completes  
Processing...  
The printer is currently processing a job  
but is not yet picking pages. When paper  
motion begins, this message will be  
replaced by a message that indicates  
which tray the job is being printed from.  
No action necessary.  
Processing...  
The printer is currently processing or  
printing collated copies. The message  
indicates that copy X of Y total copies is  
currently being processed.  
No action necessary.  
No action necessary.  
copy <X> of <Y>  
Processing...  
from tray xx  
The printer is actively processing a job  
from the designated tray.  
RAM DISK DEVICE  
FAILURE  
A device failure has occurred on the  
specified drive.  
1. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
2. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
3. If the message still persists, contact  
HP Support.  
RAM DISK FILE  
OPERATION FAILED  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
The printer received a PJL file system  
command that attempted to perform an  
illogical operation (for example, to  
download a file to a non-existent  
directory).  
1. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
2. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
3. If the message reappears, there  
may be a problem with the software  
application.  
Printing may continue.  
RAM DISK FILE  
SYSTEM IS FULL  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
The printer received a PJL file system  
command that attempted to store  
something on the file system but was  
unsuccessful because the file system is  
full.  
1. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
2. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
Note  
This will also delete any files saved in  
RAM.  
RAM DISK IS  
WRITE PROTECTED  
To clear press  
alternates with  
Ready  
The file system device is protected and  
no new files can be written to it.  
1. To enable writing to the RAM disk,  
turn off write protection, using  
HP Web Jetadmin software.  
2. To clear the message, press the  
key.  
3. If the message persists, turn the  
printer off and then back on.  
172 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
Ready  
The printer is online and ready for data.  
No status or device attendance  
messages are pending at the display.  
No action necessary.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
Ready  
The printer is in a special diagnostics  
mode.  
Press the STOP key to exit the special  
diagnostics mode.  
Diagnostics mode  
To exit press the STOP key  
OR  
No action is necessary.  
Receiving  
upgrade  
A firmware upgrade is in progress.  
Do not turn the printer off until the printer  
returns to Ready.  
REMOVE ALL  
The printer is executing a Component  
Test and the component selected is Belt  
Only.  
Remove all print cartridges.  
PRINT CARTRIDGES  
To exit press the STOP key  
REMOVE AT LEAST ONE  
CARTRIDGE  
The printer is executing a Disable  
Cartridge Check or Component Test  
where the component selected is  
Cartridge Motor.  
Remove one print cartridge.  
To exit press the STOP key  
REPLACE <COLOR>  
CARTRIDGE  
The identified print cartridge has  
1. Open the top cover and image  
transfer unit.  
reached the end of life and the COLOR  
SUPPLY OUT setting in SYSTEM  
SETUP is set to STOP. Printing will not  
continue until the cartridge is replaced.  
CAUTION  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
The image transfer unit can be  
easily damaged.  
alternates with  
2. Remove the identified print cartridge.  
3. Install a new print cartridge.  
For help press  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
4. Close the top and front covers.  
5. Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
Web server for more information.  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 173  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
REPLACE <COLOR>  
CARTRIDGE  
The identified print cartridge is nearing  
the end of its useful life and the  
SUPPLIES LOW setting in SYSTEM  
SETUP is set to STOP.  
1. Order the identified print cartridge.  
2. To continue printing, press  
.
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
3. To replace the cartridge, perform  
the following steps:  
Open the top cover and image  
transfer unit.  
alternates with  
To continue press  
CAUTION  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
The image transfer unit can be  
easily damaged.  
Remove the identified print  
cartridge.  
Install a new print cartridge.  
Close the top and front covers.  
Supplies ordering information is  
also available from the  
embedded Web server. See  
server for more information.  
REPLACE FUSER KIT  
For help press  
The fuser kit has reached the end of its  
life. Printing will not continue until the  
fuser has been replaced.  
1. Open the top cover.  
2. Loosen the blue thumb screws.  
3. Remove the old fuser unit.  
4. Install a new fuser unit and secure  
with thumb screws.  
5. Close the top cover.  
6. Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
Web server for more information.  
REPLACE FUSER KIT  
For help press  
The fuser is nearing the end of its useful  
life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in  
SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP.  
1. Order the fuser kit.  
2. To continue printing, press  
.
3. To replace the fuser kit, perform the  
following steps:  
alternates with  
REPLACE FUSER KIT  
To continue press  
Open the top cover.  
Loosen the blue thumb screws.  
Remove the old fuser unit.  
Install a new fuser unit and  
secure with thumb screws.  
Close the top cover.  
Supplies ordering information is  
also available from the  
embedded Web server. See  
server for more information.  
174 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
REPLACE SUPPLIES  
For status press  
Multiple supplies are at the end of their  
useful life. If the supplies affected are  
cartridges only, printing has stopped  
because the COLOR SUPPLY OUT  
setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to  
STOP. If the fuser or transfer kit is  
affected, then printing always stops.  
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES  
STATUS menu.  
2. Press and to highlight the  
specific supply that has a problem.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
3.  
Press to view help for the supply.  
4. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
5. Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
Web server for more information.  
REPLACE SUPPLIES  
To continue press  
Multiple supplies are at the end of their  
useful life and the SUPPLIES LOW  
setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP.  
1. Press to access the SUPPLIES  
STATUS menu.  
2. Press and to highlight the  
specific supply that has a problem.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
3.  
Press to view help for the supply.  
4. Press and to step through the  
instructions.  
5. Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
Web server for more information.  
REPLACE SUPPLIES  
Using black only  
At least one color cartridge is at the end  
of its useful life and the COLOR  
SUPPLY OUT setting in SYSTEM  
SETUP is set to autoContinueBlack.  
Printing will continue using black toner  
only.  
Press to identify which supplies should  
be replaced. Replace identified supplies  
to continue printing in color.  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
alternates with  
Ready  
For help press  
The supplies gauge will display the  
consumption levels of print  
cartridges.  
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT  
For help press  
The transfer unit is at end of life. Printing 1. Open the top and front cover.  
will not continue until the the transfer kit  
2. Remove the old unit by pressing the  
has been replaced.  
blue buttons on either side of the unit.  
3. Slide the old unit out of the printer.  
4. Install a new transfer unit.  
5. Close the front and top covers.  
6. Supplies ordering information is also  
available from the embedded Web  
Web server for more information.  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 175  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT  
For help press  
The transfer unit is nearing the end of its 1. Order the transfer kit.  
useful life and the SUPPLIES LOW  
2. To continue printing, press  
.
setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP.  
3. To replace the transfer kit, perform  
the following steps:  
alternates with  
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT  
To continue press  
Open the top and front cover.  
Remove the old unit by  
pressing the blue buttons on  
either side of the unit.  
Slide the old unit out of the  
printer.  
Install a new transfer unit.  
Close the front and top covers.  
Supplies ordering information is  
also available from the  
embedded Web server. See  
server for more information.  
Request accepted  
please wait  
The printer has accepted a request to  
print an internal page, but the current job  
must finish printing before the internal  
page will print.  
No action necessary.  
Resend  
upgrade  
The firmware upgrade was not  
completed successfully.  
Attempt upgrade again.  
No action necessary.  
Resetting Kit Count  
YES is selected in the Reset Supplies  
menu, to reset the counts for any of the  
supplies that cannot be detected as new.  
RESTORE FACTORY  
SETTINGS  
The printer is restoring factory settings.  
No action necessary.  
Restoring...  
The printer is restoring settings.  
No action necessary.  
Rotating <COLOR>  
motor  
A component test is in progress; the  
component selected is the <color>  
Cartridge motor.  
Press STOP when ready to stop this test.  
To exit press  
the STOP key  
Rotating motor  
To exit press  
the STOP key  
The printer is executing a Component  
Test and the component selected is a  
motor.  
Press STOP when ready to stop this test.  
No action necessary.  
Setting saved  
A menu selection has been saved.  
176 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
SIZE MISMATCH IN  
TRAY X  
The tray is loaded with media longer or  
shorter in the feed direction than the size  
configured for the tray.  
1. Adjust the side and rear media  
guides against the paper.  
2. If the media used is letter, A4,  
executive, JIS B5, A5, or legal, the  
tray switch should be set to  
For help press  
alternates with  
Ready  
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to  
CUSTOM for all other media sizes.  
The tray switch must be set before  
the size can be selected from the  
control panel.  
3. If necessary, press after the tray  
is closed to reset the paper size or  
type.  
Tray X  
The printer is reporting the current  
configuration of tray X. The tray switch is  
in the CUSTOM position.  
1. If the configuration of the size and  
type is correct, press  
the message.  
to clear  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
Size specified by user  
alternates with  
2. To change media size or type, press  
.
Tray X <TYPE> <SIZE>  
To change size or type  
Press  
Use and to highlight the size or  
type, and then press to select.  
3. If action is required to change the  
size, a message with instructions  
will appear after the selection is  
attempted.  
4. See Configuring input trays for more  
details.  
TRAY X EMPTY  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
alternates with  
Ready  
The specified tray is empty and the  
current job does not currently need this  
tray to print.  
Refill the tray at a convenient time.  
TRAY X OPEN  
For help press  
alternates with  
Ready  
The specified tray is open or not closed  
completely.  
Close the tray.  
TRAY X SIZE= *<SIZE>  
Setting saved  
The size selected from the menu has  
been saved.  
No action is necessary.  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 177  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
TRAY X SIZE= *<SIZE>  
Setting saved  
A detectable media size was selected  
from the menu and the tray switch is set  
to CUSTOM.  
1. Adjust the side and rear media  
guides against the paper.  
2. If the media used is letter, A4,  
executive, JIS B5, A5, or legal, the  
tray switch should be set to  
alternates with  
Although not required, the size selected  
can be automatically sensed if the tray  
switch is moved to STANDARD.  
TRAY XX SIZE=<SIZE>  
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to  
CUSTOM for all other media sizes.  
The tray switch must be set before  
the size can be selected from the  
control panel.  
Recommend move switch to  
STANDARD  
3. Reset the paper size in the paper  
handling menu or tray size pop-up  
menu.  
TRAY X SIZE= *<SIZE>  
Settings not saved  
alternates with  
A non-detectable media size was  
selected from the menu and the tray  
switch is set to STANDARD.  
1. Adjust the side and rear media  
guides against the paper.  
2. If the media used is letter, A4,  
executive, JIS B5, A5, or legal, the  
tray switch should be set to  
In order to change the tray size to the  
size selected, the tray switch must first  
be in the CUSTOM position.  
TRAY XX SIZE=<SIZE>  
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to  
CUSTOM for all other media sizes.  
The tray switch must be set before  
the size can be selected from the  
control panel.  
To change move tray switch to  
CUSTOM  
3. Reset the paper size in the paper  
handling menu or the tray size pop-  
up menu.  
TRAY X SIZE= *<SIZE>  
Settings not saved  
alternates with  
A detectable media size was selected  
from the menu, but the tray guide  
sensors detect a different size.  
1. Adjust the side and rear media  
guides against the paper.  
2. If the media used is letter, A4,  
executive, JIS B5, A5, or legal, the  
tray switch should be set to  
The size selected from the menu does  
not match the size detected by the tray.  
Size detection occurs when the tray  
switch is set to the STANDARD position.  
The tray switch is already in the correct  
position for the size selected.  
TRAY XX SIZE=<SIZE>  
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to  
CUSTOM for all other media sizes.  
The tray switch must be set before  
the size can be selected from the  
control panel.  
To change size move guides in  
tray  
3. If necessary, reset the paper size  
again.  
TRAY X SIZE= *<SIZE>  
Verify tray switch  
set to CUSTOM  
A non-detectable media size was  
selected from the menu and the tray is  
open.  
1. Adjust the side and rear media  
guides against the paper.  
2. If the media used is letter, A4,  
executive, JIS B5, A5, or legal, the  
tray switch should be set to  
The selected size requires that the tray  
switch be set to CUSTOM, otherwise  
when the tray is closed, the tray size will  
change.  
alternates with  
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to  
CUSTOM for all other media sizes.  
The tray switch must be set before  
the size can be selected from the  
control panel.  
TRAY X SIZE= *<SIZE>  
Then close tray  
3. Close the tray.  
178 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
TRAY XX SIZE=<SIZE>  
A detectable media size was selected  
from the menu and the tray is open.  
1. Adjust the side and rear media  
guides against the paper.  
Recommend move switch to  
STANDARD  
Although not required, the size selected  
can be automatically sensed if the tray  
switch is moved to STANDARD.  
2. If the media used is letter, A4,  
executive, JIS B5, A5, or legal, the  
tray switch should be set to  
alternates with  
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to  
CUSTOM for all other media sizes.  
The tray switch must be set before  
the size can be selected from the  
control panel.  
TRAY XX SIZE=<SIZE>  
Then close tray  
TYPE MISMATCH IN  
TRAY X  
The media type loaded in the tray does  
not match the media type configured for  
the tray.  
1. Adjust the side and rear guides  
against the paper.  
2. If size is a detectable size, set the  
tray switch to STANDARD,  
otherwise set the tray switch to  
CUSTOM.  
For help press  
alternates with  
Ready  
3. If necessary, press after the tray  
is closed to change the paper size  
or type.  
Unable To Mopy Job  
alternates with  
A Mopy job cannot be mopied because  
of a memory, disk, or configuration  
problem. Only one copy will be produced.  
Install additional memory in the printer or  
install a disk drive in the printer.  
Processing...  
Unable To Store Job  
alternates with  
A job cannot be stored because of a  
memory, disk, or configuration problem.  
Install additional memory in the printer,  
or install a disk drive into the printer. If a  
disk drive is installed, delete previously  
stored print jobs.  
Processing...  
USE TRAY X  
The printer is reporting the current  
configuration of tray X. The tray switch is  
in the STANDARD position.  
1. If the configuration of the size and  
type is correct, press  
the message.  
to clear  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
Size detected by tray  
alternates with  
Tray X  
2. To change media size or type, press  
.
Use and to highlight the size or  
type, and then press to select.  
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
To change size or type  
press  
3. If action is required to change the  
size, a message with instructions  
will appear after the selection is  
attempted.  
USE TRAY X  
The printer is offering a selection of  
alternate media to use for the print job.  
1. View tray configurations (type and  
size) using and  
.
<TYPE> <SIZE>  
2. Press to select a tray to use.  
To change press  
To use press  
/
Wait for printer  
to reinitialize  
RAM disk settings have been changed  
before the printer automatically restarts,  
or external device modes have changed  
or the printer is coming out of the  
diagnostics mode and will automatically  
restart.  
No action necessary.  
ENWW  
Control panel messages 179  
Control panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
Warming up  
The printer is coming out of PowerSave  
mode. Printing will continue as soon as  
warmup is completed.  
No action necessary.  
180 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Paper jams  
Use this illustration to troubleshoot paper jams in the printer. For instructions on clearing  
paper jams, see Clearing paper jams.  
Paper jam locations (shown without optional Tray 4 or optional Tray 5)  
1
2
3
4
5
top cover area  
duplex path  
paper path  
input path  
trays  
Paper jam recovery  
This printer automatically provides paper jam recovery, a feature that allows you to set  
whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages. The options are:  
AUTO Printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages.  
OFF Printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages.  
During the recovery process, the printer may reprint several good pages that were printed  
before the paper jam occurred. Be sure to remove any duplicated pages.  
Note  
To disable paper jam recovery  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
ENWW  
Paper jams 181  
       
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.  
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.  
6. Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY.  
7. Press to select JAM RECOVERY.  
8. Press to highlight OFF.  
9. Press to select OFF.  
10. Press the MENU button to return to the Ready state.  
To improve print speed and increase memory resources, you may want to disable paper jam  
recovery. If paper jam recovery is disabled, the pages involved in a jam will not be reprinted.  
182 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Common causes of paper jams  
The following table lists common causes of paper jams and suggested solutions for resolving  
them.  
Cause  
Solution  
Print media does not meet HP-recommended  
media specifications.  
Use only media that meets HP specifications.  
A supply item is installed incorrectly, causing  
repeated jams.  
Verify that all print cartridges, the transfer unit,  
and the fuser are correctly installed.  
You are reloading paper that has already passed Do not use media that has been previously  
through a printer or copier.  
printed on or copied.  
An input tray is loaded incorrectly.  
Remove any excess media from the input tray.  
Press media down in the input tray so it fits  
below the tabs, and within the media width  
guides. See Configuring input trays.  
Print media is skewed.  
Input tray guides are not adjusted correctly.  
Adjust input tray guides so they hold media  
firmly in place without bending it. If media  
heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb) is loaded into Tray  
2, 3, 4, or 5, the media might skew.  
Print media is binding or sticking together.  
Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, or  
flip it over. Reload media into the input tray. Do  
not fan media.  
Print media is removed before it settles into the  
output bin.  
Reset the printer. Wait until the page completely  
settles in the output bin before removing it.  
When duplexing, the print media is removed  
Reset the printer and print the document again.  
before the second side of the document is printed. Wait until the page completely settles in the  
output bin before removing it.  
Print media is in poor condition.  
Replace the print media.  
Print media is not picked up by the internal  
rollers from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.  
Remove the top sheet of media. If the media is  
heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb), it may not be  
picked from the tray.  
Print media has rough or jagged edges.  
Print media is perforated or embossed.  
Replace the media.  
This media does not separate easily. You might  
need to feed single sheets from Tray 1.  
Printer supply items have reached the end of  
their useful life.  
Check the printer control panel for messages  
prompting you to replace supplies, or print a  
supplies status page to verify the remaining life  
of the supplies. See Replacing supplies for more  
information.  
ENWW  
Common causes of paper jams 183  
   
Cause  
Solution  
Media was not stored correctly.  
Replace the print media. Media should be stored  
in the original packaging in a controlled  
environment.  
Note  
If the printer continues to jam, contact  
HP Customer Support or your authorized  
HP service provider. For more information, see  
184 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams  
Each section below corresponds with a jam message that might appear on the control panel.  
Use these procedures to clear the jam.  
Jam in Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5  
1. Using the side handles, open the top cover.  
2. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 185  
   
3. Grasp the green handles on the transfer unit and pull down.  
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is damaged,  
print quality problems may result.  
CAUTION  
4. Grasp the paper by both corners and pull up.  
5. Inspect the paper path to ensure that it is clear.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
186 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
6. Close the transfer unit and front cover.  
It is a good idea to inspect the input trays when clearing jams. However, opening and closing  
input trays has no effect on clearing jam messages.  
Note  
7. Pull out Tray 2 and place it on a flat surface. Remove any partially fed paper.  
8. Inspect the paper path above to ensure that it is clear. To remove any partially fed  
paper, grasp the paper by both corners and pull down.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 187  
9. Check to make sure the paper is located correctly and flush with the paper guides.  
10. Insert the tray into the printer. Make sure all trays are completely closed.  
11. Close the top cover.  
188 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Jam in Tray 3, 4, or 5  
1. Using the side handles, open the top cover.  
2. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 189  
 
3. Grasp the green handles on the transfer unit and pull down.  
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is damaged,  
print quality problems may result.  
CAUTION  
4. Grasp the paper by both corners and pull up.  
5. Inspect the paper path to ensure that it is clear.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
190 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
6. Close the transfer unit and front cover.  
7. Pull out Trays 3, 4, and 5 (if applicable) and place them on a flat surface.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 191  
8. Remove any partially fed paper.  
9. Inspect the above paper path to ensure that it is clear.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
10. Check Trays 3, 4, and 5 to make sure the paper is located correctly and flush with the  
paper guides.  
11. Insert the trays into the printer.  
192 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
12. Pull out Tray 2 and place it on a flat surface.  
13. Remove any partially fed paper.  
14. Inspect the above paper path to ensure that it is clear.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 193  
15. Check the slot at the front of Tray 2, and make sure the paper is loaded correctly and  
flush with the paper guides.  
16. Insert Tray 2 into the printer. Make sure all trays are completely closed.  
17. Close the top cover.  
194 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Jams in the top cover  
Jams in the top cover occur in the areas indicated below. Use the procedures in this section  
to clear jams in these areas.  
Jammed paper  
Crumpled paper in the fuser  
Paper wrapped around the fuser  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 195  
 
Jam in the top cover  
Do not touch the fuser. It is hot and could cause burns! The fuser’s operating temperature is  
190°C (374°F). Wait ten minutes to allow the fuser to cool before touching the fuser.  
WARNING!  
1. Using the side handles, open the top cover.  
2. Firmly pull forward on the two green levers to disengage the fuser rollers.  
Do not touch the fuser. It is hot and could cause burns! The fuser’s operating temperature is  
190°C (374°F). Wait ten minutes to allow the fuser to cool before touching the fuser.  
WARNING!  
196 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
3. Grasp the paper by both corners to remove it, if possible.  
Be sure to pull the media straight up.  
CAUTION  
4. Open the fuser cover and pull up to remove any paper that is crumpled in the fuser.  
Do not reach into the fuser until it has cooled.  
WARNING!  
Note  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 197  
5. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
6. Grasp the green handles on the transfer unit and pull down.  
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is damaged,  
print quality problems may result.  
CAUTION  
7. If the paper is wrapped around the fuser roller or stuck in the rollers, grasp the paper by  
both corners and pull down.  
If the paper is wrapped around the roller, it is important to pull down on the paper to remove  
Note  
it. Pulling up on the paper can damage the fuser rollers and cause print quality problems.  
Do not reach into the fuser until it has cooled.  
WARNING!  
Note  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
198 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
8. Firmly push the two green levers on either side of the fuser to re-engage the fuser rollers.  
9. Close the transfer unit and front cover.  
10. Close the top cover.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 199  
Jam in paper input path or paper path  
1. Using the side handles, open the top cover.  
2. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
3. Grasp the green handles on the transfer unit and pull down.  
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is damaged,  
print quality problems may result.  
CAUTION  
200 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
 
4. Grasp the paper by both corners and pull up.  
5. Inspect the paper path to ensure that it is clear.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
6. Close the transfer unit and front cover.  
7. Pull out Tray 2 (and Trays 3, 4, and 5, if the printer contains these trays). Place each  
tray on a flat surface. Remove any partially fed paper from these trays.  
8. Inspect the paper path above and below to ensure that it is clear.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 201  
9. Check Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5 to make sure the paper is located correctly in each tray and  
flush with the paper guides. Insert the trays into the printer. Make sure all trays are  
completely closed.  
10. Close the top cover.  
Multiple jams in paper path  
1. Using the side handles, open the top cover.  
202 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
 
2. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
3. Grasp the green handles on the transfer unit and pull down.  
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is damaged,  
print quality problems may result.  
CAUTION  
4. Inspect the transfer unit to ensure that it is clear.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 203  
5. Grasp the media by both corners to remove it, if possible.  
If the media tears, make sure that all media fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
6. Firmly pull forward on the two green levers to disengage the fuser rollers.  
Do not touch the fuser. It is hot and could cause burns! The fuser operating temperature is  
190 °C (374°F). Wait ten minutes to allow the fuser to cool before touching it.  
WARNING!  
7. Open the fuser cover.  
204 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
8. Inspect the fuser and remove any paper that is crumpled in the fuser.  
Do not reach into the fuser until it has cooled.  
WARNING!  
Note  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
9. Close the fuser cover.  
10. Firmly push the two green levers on either side of the fuser to re-engage the fuser rollers.  
11. Close the transfer unit and the front cover.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 205  
12. Pull out Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 and place each tray on a flat surface. Remove any partially  
fed paper from these trays.  
13. Inspect the paper path above and below each tray to ensure that it is clear.  
14. Close the top cover.  
206 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Jam in duplex path  
1. Using the side handles, open the top cover.  
2. Grasp the paper by both corners and pull down.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
3. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 207  
 
4. Grasp the paper by both corners and pull up.  
5. If the paper cannot be accessed from this location, grasp the green handles on the  
transfer unit and pull down.  
6. Grasp the paper by both corners and pull up.  
7. Close the transfer unit and front cover.  
208 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
8. Close the top cover.  
Multiple jams in duplex path  
1. Using the side handles, open the top cover.  
2. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 209  
 
3. Grasp the paper by both corners and pull down.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
4. Firmly pull forward on the two green levers to disengage the fuser rollers.  
Do not touch the fuser. It is hot and could cause burns! The fuser’s operating temperature is  
190°C (374°F).Wait 10 minutes to allow the fuser to cool before touching it.  
WARNING!  
5. Open the fuser cover.  
6. Inspect the fuser and remove any paper that is crumpled in the fuser.  
Do not reach into the fuser until it has cooled.  
WARNING!  
Note  
If the media tears, make sure that all media fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
210 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
7. Close the fuser cover.  
8. Firmly push the two green levers on either side of the fuser to re-engage the fuser rollers.  
9. Grasp the front cover and pull down.  
10. Grasp the green handles on the transfer unit and pull down.  
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is damaged,  
print quality problems may result.  
CAUTION  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 211  
11. Inspect the transfer unit to ensure that it is clear.  
If the media tears, make sure that all media fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
12. Grasp the media by both corners to remove it, if possible.  
13. Close the transfer unit.  
14. If you could not reach the paper with the transfer unit open in Step 12, grasp the paper  
by both corners and pull up.  
212 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
15. Pull out Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 and place each tray on a flat surface. Remove any partially  
fed paper from these trays.  
16. Inspect the paper path above and below each tray to ensure that it is clear.  
17. Remove any partially fed paper.  
18. Inspect the above paper path to ensure that it is clear.  
If the paper tears, make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path  
before resuming printing.  
Note  
ENWW  
Clearing paper jams 213  
19. Check the slot at the front of each tray, and make sure the paper is loaded correctly and  
flush with the paper guides.  
20. Insert all trays into the printer. Make sure all trays are completely closed.  
21. Close the top cover.  
214 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Media-handling problems  
Use only media that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print  
Media Guide. For ordering information, see Supplies and accessories.  
For paper specifications for this printer, see Supported paper weights and sizes.  
Printer feeds multiple sheets  
Cause  
Solution  
The input tray is overfilled.  
Remove excess media from the input tray.  
The paper exceeds the maximum stack height  
indicator mark in the input tray (Trays 2, 3, 4,  
and 5).  
Open the input tray and verify that the paper  
stack is below the maximum stack height  
indicator mark.  
Print media is sticking together.  
Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or  
flip it over, and then reload it into the tray.  
Note  
Do not fan media. Fanning can cause static  
electricity, which can cause media to stick  
together.  
Media does not meet the specifications for this  
printer.  
Use only media that meets HP media  
specifications for this printer. See Supported  
Glossy paper is being used in a high humidity  
environment.  
Use another type of paper.  
Printer feeds incorrect page size  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct size media is not loaded in the input  
tray.  
Load the correct size media in the input tray.  
The correct size media is not selected in the  
software application or printer driver.  
Confirm that the settings in the application and  
printer driver are appropriate, since the  
application settings override the printer driver  
and control panel settings, and the printer driver  
settings override the control panel settings. For  
more information about how to access the printer  
The correct size media for Tray 1 is not selected  
in the printer control panel.  
From the control panel, select the correct size  
media for Tray 1.  
The media size is not configured correctly for the Print a configuration page or use the control  
input tray.  
panel to determine the media size for which the  
tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the rear and width media guides are  
touching the paper.  
ENWW  
Media-handling problems 215  
       
Printer feeds incorrect page size (continued)  
Cause  
Solution  
The CUSTOM/STANDARD switch in the tray is  
not in the correct position.  
Verify that the switch is in the correct position for  
the media size.  
Printer pulls from incorrect tray  
Cause  
Solution  
You are using a driver for a different printer. For  
more information about how to access the printer  
Use a driver for this printer.  
The specified tray is empty.  
Load media in the specified tray.  
Tray behavior for the requested tray is set to  
FIRST in the system setup submenu of the  
configure device menu.  
Change the setting to EXCLUSIVELY.  
The media size is not configured correctly for the Print a configuration page or use the control  
input tray.  
panel to determine the media size for which the  
tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.  
The CUSTOM/STANDARD switch in the tray is  
not in the correct position.  
Verify that the switch is in the correct position for  
the media size.  
The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting in the  
printer control panel is set to EXCLUSIVELY,  
and the requested tray is empty. The printer will  
not use another tray.  
Load paper in the requested tray.  
or  
Change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to  
FIRST in the Configuration menu. This will allow  
the printer to use the paper in other trays if no  
paper is loaded in the specified tray.  
Media does not feed automatically  
Cause  
Solution  
Manual feed is selected in the software  
application.  
Load Tray 1 with media, or, if the media is  
loaded, press  
.
The correct size media is not loaded.  
The input tray is empty.  
Load the correct size media.  
Load media into the input tray.  
Media from a previous jam has not been  
completely removed.  
Open the printer and remove any media in the  
paper path. Closely inspect the fuser area for  
jams. See Paper jams.  
The media size is not configured correctly for the Print a configuration page or use the control  
input tray.  
panel to determine the media size for which the  
tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.  
The CUSTOM/STANDARD switch in the tray is  
not in the correct position.  
Verify that the switch is in the correct position for  
the media size.  
216 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
   
Media does not feed automatically (continued)  
Cause  
Solution  
Manual feed prompt is set to ALWAYS. The  
printer will always prompt for manual feed, even  
if paper is in the tray.  
Open the tray, reload the paper, and then close  
the tray.  
Otherwise, change the manual feed prompt  
setting to UNLESS LOADED. Using this setting,  
the printer will prompt for manual feed unless  
paper is already in the tray.  
The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting in the  
printer control panel is set to EXCLUSIVELY,  
and the requested tray is empty. The printer will  
not use another tray.  
Load paper in the requested tray.  
or  
Change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to  
FIRST in the Configuration menu. This will allow  
the printer to use the paper in other trays if no  
paper is loaded in the specified tray.  
Unable to select paper sizes for Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 using the printer control panel.  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer automatically detects some paper  
Set the tray switch to Custom, or adjust the  
sizes when the tray switch is set to Standard and paper width and length guides to fit snugly  
the paper width and length guides are in a  
standard paper size position.  
against the paper stack. For more information,  
Media does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5  
Cause  
Solution  
Manual feed is selected in the software  
application.  
Load Tray 1 with media, or, if the media is  
loaded, press  
.
The correct size media is not loaded.  
The input tray is empty.  
Load the correct size media.  
Load media in the input tray.  
The correct media type for the input tray is not  
selected in the printer control panel.  
From the printer control panel, select the correct  
media type for the input tray.  
Media from a previous jam has not been  
completely removed.  
Open the printer and remove any media in the  
paper path. Closely inspect the fuser area for  
jams. See Paper jams.  
Tray 3, 4, or 5 does not appear as an input tray  
option.  
Tray 3, 4, and 5 only display as an option if they  
are installed. Verify that Tray 3, 4, and 5 are  
correctly installed. Verify that the printer driver  
has been configured to recognize Tray 3, 4, and  
5. For more information about how to access the  
printer drivers, see Accessing the printer drivers.  
Tray 3, 4, or 5 is incorrectly installed.  
Print a configuration page to confirm that Tray 3,  
4, or 5 is installed. If not, verify that the optional  
installed 500-sheet feeder assembly or 2 x 500-  
sheet feeder assembly is correctly attached to  
the printer.  
ENWW  
Media-handling problems 217  
   
Media does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 (continued)  
Cause  
Solution  
The media size is not configured correctly for the Print a configuration page or use the control  
input tray.  
panel to determine the media size for which the  
tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.  
The CUSTOM/STANDARD switch in the tray is  
not in the correct position.  
Verify that the switch is in the correct position for  
the media size.  
The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting in the  
printer control panel is set to EXCLUSIVELY,  
and the requested tray is empty. The printer will  
not use another tray.  
Load paper in the requested tray.  
or  
Change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to  
FIRST in the Configuration menu. This will allow  
the printer to use the paper in other trays if no  
paper is loaded in the specified tray.  
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct media type is not specified in the  
software or printer driver.  
Verify that the correct media type is selected in  
the software or printer driver.  
The input tray is overfilled.  
Remove excess media from the input tray. Do  
not load more than 200 sheets of glossy paper  
or glossy film, or more than 100 transparencies  
in Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5. Do not exceed the maximum  
stack height for Tray 1.  
Media in another input tray is the same size as  
the transparencies, and the printer is defaulting  
to the other tray.  
Make sure that the input tray containing the  
transparencies or glossy paper is selected in the  
software application or printer driver. Use the  
printer control panel to configure the tray to the  
media type loaded. For more information about  
how to access the printer drivers, see Accessing  
The tray containing the transparencies or glossy  
paper is not configured correctly for type.  
Make sure that the input tray containing the  
transparencies or glossy paper is selected in the  
software application or printer driver. Use the  
printer control panel to configure the tray to the  
media type loaded. See Configuring input trays.  
For more information about how to access the  
printer drivers, see Accessing the printer drivers.  
Transparencies or glossy paper may not meet  
supported media specifications.  
Use only media that meets the HP media  
specifications for this printer. See Supported  
Transparencies are not printed correctly and the control panel displays an error  
message indicating a problem with the media in the tray.  
Cause  
Solution  
The OHT sensor is dirty, causing a 41.5  
Clean the OHT sensor. See Periodic cleaning.  
UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY error.  
218 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
     
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the printer  
Cause  
Solution  
Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray.  
Only Tray 1 can feed envelopes.  
Load envelopes into Tray 1.  
Envelopes are curled or damaged.  
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in  
a controlled environment. Try rotating the  
envelope orientation to load long-edge first, and  
set the tray switch to Custom. See Configuring  
Envelopes are sealing because the moisture  
content is too high.  
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in  
a controlled environment.  
Envelope orientation is incorrect.  
Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly. See  
This printer does not support the envelopes  
being used.  
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.  
Tray 1 is configured for a size other than  
envelopes.  
Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes.  
Output is curled or wrinkled  
Cause  
Solution  
Media does not meet the specifications for this  
printer.  
Use only media that meets the HP media  
specifications for this printer. See Supported  
Media is damaged or in poor condition.  
Remove media from the input tray and load  
media that is in good condition.  
Printer is operating in an excessively humid  
environment.  
Verify that the printing environment is within  
humidity specifications. See Printer specifications.  
You are printing large, solid-filled areas.  
Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive  
curl. Try using a different pattern.  
Media used was not stored correctly and may  
have absorbed moisture.  
Remove media and replace it with media from a  
fresh, unopened package.  
Media has poorly cut edges.  
Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or  
turn it over, and then reload it into the input tray.  
Do not fan media. If the problem persists,  
replace the media.  
The specific media type was not configured for  
the tray or selected in the software.  
Configure the software for the media (see the  
software documentation). Configure the tray for  
the media, see Configuring input trays.  
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly  
Cause  
Solution  
You are trying to duplex on unsupported media.  
Verify that the media is supported for duplex  
ENWW  
Media-handling problems 219  
         
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (continued)  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.  
The first page is printing on the back of  
preprinted forms or letterhead.  
Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1  
with the letterhead or printed side up and the  
bottom of the page feeding into the printer. For  
Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5, load these media printed side  
down with the top of the page toward the back of  
the printer.  
Printer model does not support two-sided printing. The HP Color Laser Jet 5550 and HP Color  
Laser Jet 5550N do not support automatic two-  
sided printing.  
220 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Printer response problems  
No display message  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer’s on/off button is in the standby  
position.  
Verify that the printer is on. Fans may run while  
the printer is in standby mode (off).  
The printer’s memory DIMMs are defective or  
installed incorrectly.  
Verify that the printer’s memory DIMMs are  
correctly installed and are not defective.  
The power cord is not firmly plugged into both  
the printer and the power receptacle.  
Turn off the printer and then disconnect and  
reconnect the power cord. Turn the printer back  
on.  
The line voltage is incorrect for the printer power  
configuration.  
Connect the printer to a proper voltage source,  
as specified on the Power Rating Label on the  
back of the printer.  
The power cord is damaged or excessively worn. Replace the power cord.  
The power source receptacle is not working  
correctly.  
Connect the printer to a different power  
receptacle.  
Printer is on, but nothing prints  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer’s Ready indicator light is not lit.  
Press STOP to return the printer to the Ready  
state.  
The top cover is not closed properly.  
Close the top cover firmly.  
The Data indicator light is flashing.  
The printer is probably still receiving data. Wait  
for the Data indicator to stop flashing.  
REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE appears on  
the printer display.  
Replace the print cartridge specified on the  
printer display.  
A printer message other than Ready appears on See Control panel messages.  
the printer control panel.  
The parallel port may have a DOS timeout error.  
Add a MODE command to the AUTOEXEC.BAT  
file. See the DOS manual for additional  
information.  
The PS (PostScript Emulation) personality is not  
selected.  
Select PS or AUTO for the printer language. For  
more information, see Changing printer control  
The correct driver is not selected in the software  
application or printer driver.  
Select the driver for PostScript Emulation for this  
printer in the software application or printer  
driver. For more information about how to  
access the printer drivers, see Accessing the  
The printer is not properly configured.  
ENWW  
Printer response problems 221  
         
Printer is on, but nothing prints (continued)  
Cause  
Solution  
The computer port is not configured or is not  
working properly.  
Run another peripheral connected to this port to  
verify that the port is working properly.  
The printer has not been correctly named for the  
network or for a Macintosh computer.  
Use the appropriate utility to name the printer on  
the network. For Macintosh OS 9.x computers,  
select the printer from within the Chooser. For  
Macintosh OS X 10.1 and later, open the Print  
Center Application, select the connection type,  
and then select the printer.  
Printer is on, but is not receiving data  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer’s Ready indicator light is not lit.  
Press STOP to return the printer to the Ready  
state.  
The top cover is not closed properly.  
Close the top cover firmly.  
A printer message other than Ready appears on See Control panel messages.  
the printer control panel.  
The interface cable is not correct for this  
configuration.  
Select the correct interface cable for your  
configuration. See Parallel configuration, or  
The interface cable is not securely connected to  
both the printer and the computer.  
Disconnect and reconnect the interface cable.  
The printer is not configured correctly.  
settings for configuration information.  
The interface configurations on the printer’s  
configuration page do not match the  
configurations on the host computer.  
Configure the printer to match the computer  
configuration.  
The computer is not working properly.  
Try using an application that you know works  
properly to check the computer, or, in DOS, type  
Dir>Prn at the DOS prompt.  
The computer port that the printer is connected  
to is not configured or is not working properly.  
Run another peripheral connected to this port to  
verify that the port is working properly.  
The printer has not been correctly named for the  
network or Macintosh computer.  
Use the appropriate utility to name the printer on  
the network. For Macintosh OS 9.x computers,  
select the printer from within the Chooser. For  
Macintosh OS X 10.1 and later, open the Print  
Center Application, select the connection type,  
and select the printer.  
Unable to select the printer from the computer  
Cause  
Solution  
If you are using a switch box, the printer may not Select the correct printer through the switch box.  
be selected for the computer.  
222 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
   
Unable to select the printer from the computer (continued)  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer’s Ready indicator light is not lit.  
Press STOP to return the printer to the Ready  
state.  
A printer message other than Ready appears on See Control panel messages.  
the printer control panel.  
The correct printer driver is not installed in the  
computer.  
Install the correct printer driver. For more  
information about how to access the printer  
The correct printer and port are not selected on  
the computer.  
Select the correct printer and port.  
The network is not configured properly for this  
printer.  
Use the network software to verify the printer’s  
network configuration, or consult with the  
network administrator.  
The power source receptacle is not working  
correctly.  
Connect the printer to a different power  
receptacle.  
ENWW  
Printer response problems 223  
Printer control panel problems  
Control panel settings work incorrectly  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer control panel display is blank or is  
not lit, even when the fan is running.  
Fans may run while the printer is in standby  
mode (off). Press the printer’s on/off button to  
turn the printer on.  
Printer settings in the printing software  
application or printer driver differ from the printer  
control panel settings.  
Confirm that the settings in the application and  
printer driver are appropriate, since the  
application settings override the printer driver  
and control panel settings, and the printer driver  
settings override the control panel settings. For  
more information about how to access the printer  
Control panel settings were not correctly saved  
after they were changed.  
Reselect the control panel settings and then  
press . An asterisk (*) should appear to the  
right of the setting.  
The Data indicator light is lit, and there are no  
pages printing.  
Buffered data exists in the printer. Press to  
print the buffered data using current control  
panel settings and activate the new control panel  
settings.  
If the printer is on a network, another user may  
have changed printer control panel settings.  
Consult the network administrator to coordinate  
changes to printer control panel settings.  
Unable to select Tray 3, 4, or 5  
Cause  
Solution  
Tray 3, 4, or 5 do not appear as an input tray  
option on the configuration page or on the  
control panel.  
The tray only displays as an option if it is  
installed. Verify that Tray 3, 4, or 5 is correctly  
installed.  
Tray 3, 4, or 5 do not appear as an option in the  
printer driver.  
Verify that the printer driver configuration  
recognizes Tray 3, 4, or 5. For more information  
about how to access the printer drivers, see  
224 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
       
Color printing problems  
Printing black instead of color  
Cause  
Solution  
Color mode is not selected in the software  
application or printer driver.  
Select color mode instead of grayscale or  
monochrome mode in the software application or  
printer driver, see Printer information pages to  
learn how to print a configuration page.  
The correct printer driver is not selected in your  
software application.  
Select the correct printer driver.  
No color appears on the configuration page.  
Consult your service representative.  
Incorrect shade  
Cause  
Solution  
The sealing tape has not been removed from the Remove the sealing tape from the print cartridge  
print cartridge.  
for the color that is missing. See Changing print  
The media does not meet the specifications for  
this printer.  
See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media  
Guide.  
HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide  
ordering information. When you connect, select  
ljpaperguide to download the guide in PDF format.  
You are operating the printer in excessively  
humid conditions.  
Verify that the printer’s environment is within  
humidity specifications.  
Note  
For more information about color quality  
The OHT sensor might be dirty.  
Clean the OHT sensor. See Periodic cleaning.  
Missing color  
Cause  
Solution  
Defective HP print cartridge.  
A non-HP cartridge might be installed.  
Replace the cartridge.  
Ensure that you are using a genuine HP print  
cartridge.  
ENWW  
Color printing problems 225  
         
Inconsistent colors after installing a print cartridge  
Cause  
Solution  
The sealing tape has not been removed from the Remove the sealing tape from the print cartridge  
print cartridge.  
for the color that is missing. See Changing print  
Another print cartridge may be low.  
Check the supplies gauge on the control panel  
or print a supplies status page. See Printer  
Print cartridges may be improperly installed.  
A non-HP cartridge might be installed.  
Verify that each print cartridge is installed  
properly.  
Ensure that you are using a genuine HP print  
cartridge.  
Printed colors do not match screen colors  
Cause  
Solution  
Extremely light screen colors are not being  
printed.  
The software application may interpret extremely  
light colors as white. If so, avoid using extremely  
light colors.  
Extremely dark screen colors are being printed  
in black.  
The software application may interpret extremely  
dark colors as black. If so, avoid using extremely  
dark colors.  
The colors on the computer screen differ from  
the printer output.  
On the printer driver’s Color Control tab, select  
Screen Match.  
Note  
Several factors can influence your ability to  
match printed colors to those on your screen.  
These factors include print media, overhead  
lighting, software applications, operating system  
palettes, monitors, and video cards and drivers.  
226 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
   
Incorrect printer output  
Incorrect fonts are printed  
Cause  
Solution  
The font has not been correctly selected in the  
software application.  
Re-select the font in the software application.  
The font is not available to the printer.  
Download the font to the printer or use another  
font. (In Windows, the driver does this  
automatically.)  
The correct printer driver is not selected.  
Select the correct printer driver. For more  
information about how to access the printer  
Unable to print all characters in a symbol set  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct font is not selected.  
The correct symbol set is not selected.  
Select the correct font.  
Select the correct symbol set.  
The selected character or symbol is not  
supported by the software application.  
Use a font that supports the selected character  
or symbol.  
Drifting text between printouts  
Cause  
Solution  
Your software application is not resetting the  
printer to the top of the page.  
See the documentation for the software or the  
PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package for  
specific information.  
Erratic, missing characters or interrupted printout  
Cause  
Solution  
The interface cable is of poor quality.  
Try using a different, higher-quality, IEEE-  
compliant cable. Parallel cables can be no  
longer than 10 meters (30 feet).  
The interface cable is loose.  
Disconnect and reconnect the interface cable.  
Try using a different interface cable.  
The interface cable is damaged or bad.  
The power cable is loose.  
Disconnect and reconnect the power cable.  
You are attempting to print a PCL job with the  
printer configured for PostScript Emulation.  
From the printer control panel, select the correct  
printer personality, and then resend the print job.  
You are attempting to print a PostScript job with  
the printer configured for PCL.  
From the printer control panel, select the correct  
printer personality, and then resend the print job.  
ENWW  
Incorrect printer output 227  
           
Partial printout  
Cause  
Solution  
A memory error message appears on the printer  
control panel.  
1. Free up printer memory by deleting  
unneeded downloaded fonts, style sheets,  
and macros from printer memory; or  
2. Add more memory to the printer.  
The file you are printing contains errors.  
Check the software application verify that the file  
does not contain errors. To do so:  
1. Print another file that you know is error-free  
from within the same application; or  
2. Print the file from another application.  
Guidelines for printing with different fonts  
The 80 internal fonts are available in PostScript Emulation (PS) and PCL mode.  
To conserve printer memory, download only those fonts that are needed.  
If you require several downloaded fonts, consider installing additional printer memory.  
Some software applications automatically download fonts at the beginning of each print job.  
It might be possible to configure those applications to download only soft fonts that are not  
already resident in the printer.  
228 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
   
Software application problems  
Unable to change system selections through software  
Cause  
Solution  
System software changes are locked out by the  
printer control panel.  
Consult with your network administrator.  
The software application does not support  
system changes.  
See the software application documentation.  
The correct printer driver is not loaded.  
Load the correct printer driver. For more  
information about how to access the printer  
The correct application driver is not loaded.  
Load the correct application driver.  
Unable to select a font from the software  
Cause  
Solution  
The font is not available to the software  
application.  
See the software application documentation.  
Unable to select colors from the software  
Cause  
Solution  
The software application does not support color.  
See the documentation for the software  
application.  
Color mode is not selected in the software  
Select color mode instead of grayscale or  
application or printer driver.  
monochrome mode.  
The correct printer driver is not loaded.  
Load the correct printer driver.  
Printer driver does not recognize Tray 3, 4, or 5 in the duplex printing accessory  
Cause  
Solution  
The printer driver has not been configured to  
recognize Tray 3, 4, or 5, or the duplex printing  
accessory.  
See the printer driver’s online Help for  
instructions on how to configure the driver to  
recognize printer accessories. For more  
information about how to access the printer  
The accessory may not be installed.  
Verify that the accessory is properly installed.  
ENWW  
Software application problems 229  
           
Print quality troubleshooting  
If you are experiencing problems with print quality, the following lists may help identify the  
cause of the problem.  
Print quality problems associated with paper  
Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate paper.  
Use paper that meets HP paper specifications. See Supported paper weights and sizes.  
The surface of the paper is too smooth. Use paper that meets HP paper specifications.  
The driver setting is incorrect. To change the paper type setting, see Type and Size.  
The paper you are using is too heavy for the paper type setting you selected, and the  
toner is not fusing to the paper.  
The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a  
different source or from an unopened ream of paper.  
Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an  
unopened ream of paper.  
The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic  
paper. If this solves your problem, consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that  
The paper is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic paper.  
The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion. Use only  
transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet printers.  
Overhead transparency defects  
Overhead transparencies may display any of the image quality problems that any other type  
of paper will cause, as well as defects specific to printing on transparencies. In addition,  
because transparencies are pliable while in the print path, they are subject to being marked  
by the paper-handling components.  
Allow transparencies to cool for at least 30 seconds before handling them.  
Note  
In the printer driver Paper tab, select Transparency as the paper type. Also, make sure  
that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies.  
Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer. See Supported  
paper weights and sizes. For more information, consult the HP LaserJet Printer Family  
Print Media Guide. See http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550 for HP LaserJet Printer  
Family Print Media Guide ordering information. For downloadable manuals, go to  
http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550. When you connect, select Manuals.  
The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion. Use only  
transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet printers.  
If the color is off and the printer control panel displays the 41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN  
TRAY X LOAD TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE> error, the OHT sensor might be dirty. See  
Periodic cleaning for OHT cleaning instructions.  
230 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
         
Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause  
spots and smudges.  
Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages may be caused by  
transparencies sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.  
The selected colors are undesirable when printed. Select different colors in the software  
application or printer driver.  
If you are using a reflective overhead projector, use a standard overhead projector  
instead.  
Print quality problems associated with the environment  
Print quality problems can occur if the printer is operating in an environment outside of the  
printer specifications (see Printer specifications).  
Print quality problems associated with jams  
Make sure that all paper is cleared from the paper path. See Paper jam recovery.  
If the printer recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the printer.  
If the paper does not pass through the fuser, which causes image defects to appear on  
subsequent documents, print two to three pages to clean the printer. However, if the  
problem persists see the next section.  
Print quality problems associated with maintenance  
Some print quality problems might occur when the printer needs cleaning. See Periodic  
cleaning for more information.  
Print quality troubleshooting pages  
The print quality troubleshooting pages provide information on aspects of the printer that  
affect print quality.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.  
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.  
4. Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.  
5. Press to select PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.  
The message Printing... PQ troubleshooting appears on the display until the printer  
finishes printing the print quality troubleshooting information. The printer returns to the  
Ready state after printing the print quality troubleshooting information.  
The print quality troubleshooting information includes one page for each color (cyan,  
magenta, yellow, and black), printer statistics related to print quality, instructions on  
interpreting the information, and procedures to solve print quality problems.  
If following the procedures recommended by the print quality troubleshooting pages do not  
improve print quality, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550.  
ENWW  
Print quality troubleshooting 231  
       
Calibrating the printer  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 printer automatically calibrates and cleans at various times to  
maintain the highest level of print quality. The user may also request the printer to calibrate  
via the printer’s control panel, using QUICK CALIBRATE NOW or FULL CALIBRATE NOW  
located in the CALIBRATION and PRINT QUALITY menu. QUICK CALIBRATE NOW is  
used for color tone calibration and takes about 90 seconds. If color density or tone seems  
wrong, Quick Calibration can be run. Full Calibration includes the Quick Calibrate routines  
and adds Drum Phase Calibration and Color Plane Registration (CPR). This takes about 3  
minutes and 30 seconds. If color layers (cyan, magenta, yellow, black) on the printed page  
seem to be shifted from one another, Full Calibration should be run.  
The HP Color LaserJet 5550 printer incorporates a new feature to skip calibration when  
appropriate, making the printer available more quickly. For example, when the power switch  
is turned off, then on again quickly, calibration is not needed and will be skipped. This saves  
approximately one minute in time to be ready.  
The printer may pause printing while it is calibrating or cleaning. When possible, the printer  
will wait for the job to complete before calibrating or cleaning.  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.  
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.  
6. Press to highlight QUICK CALIBRATE NOW.  
7. Press to select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW.  
OR  
To perform a full calibration, use FULL CALIBRATE NOW instead of QUICK CALIBRATE  
NOW in steps 6 and 7.  
Print quality defect chart  
Use the examples in the print quality defect chart to determine which print-quality problem  
you are experiencing, and then see the corresponding pages to find information that can  
help you troubleshoot the problem. For the latest information and problem-solving  
procedures, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550.  
The print-quality defect chart assumes the use of letter- or A4-size media that has moved  
through the printer long-edge first.  
Note  
An image with no defects  
232 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
   
Horizontal lines or  
streaks  
Misaligned colors  
Request a FULL  
CALIBRATE NOW  
using the printer  
control panel (see  
Make sure that the  
operation and  
location  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
Print the Print Quality  
Troubleshooting  
Pages (see Print  
follow the diagnostic  
procedure listed on  
the first page to help  
isolate the defect to  
a particular  
Verify that the media  
does not exceed the  
maximum weight  
supported (see Print  
component.  
Vertical lines  
Print the Print Quality  
Repetitive defects  
Make sure that the  
operation and  
location  
Troubleshooting  
Pages (see Print  
follow the diagnostic  
procedure listed on  
the first page to help  
isolate the defect to  
a particular  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
Print the Print Quality  
Troubleshooting  
Pages (see Print  
follow the diagnostic  
procedure listed on  
the first page to help  
isolate the defect to  
a particular  
component.  
component.  
Color fade in all colors  
Color fade in one color  
Make sure that the  
operation and  
location  
Make sure that the  
operation and  
location  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
Calibrate the printer.  
Calibrate the printer.  
Print the Print Quality  
Troubleshooting  
Pages (see Print  
follow the diagnostic  
procedure listed on  
the first page to help  
isolate the defect to  
a particular  
component.  
ENWW  
Print quality troubleshooting 233  
Fingerprints and media  
dents  
Loose toner  
Make sure that the  
Make sure to use  
supported media.  
operation and  
location  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
Make sure that the  
media you are using  
does not have any  
wrinkles or dents  
from handling, and  
that the media is not  
contaminated with  
visible fingerprints or  
other foreign  
Make sure to use  
supported media.  
Make sure that the  
media type and size  
for the tray are set  
correctly in the  
control panel for the  
media that you are  
using.  
substances.  
Print the Print Quality  
Troubleshooting  
Pages (see Print  
follow the diagnostic  
procedure listed on  
the first page to help  
isolate the defect to  
a particular  
Make sure that the  
media is loaded  
correctly, the size  
guides are touching  
the edges of the  
stack of media, and  
the custom-media  
switch is set  
appropriately.  
component.  
Make sure that the  
media you are using  
does not have any  
wrinkles or dents  
from handling, and  
that the media is not  
contaminated with  
visible fingerprints or  
other foreign  
substances.  
234 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Smeared toner  
White areas (dropouts)  
on page  
Make sure to use  
supported media.  
Make sure that the  
operation and  
location  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
A paper fragment  
was left in the printer  
when clearing a jam.  
Remove any paper  
fragments (see  
Make sure to use  
supported media.  
Make sure that the  
media you are using  
does not have any  
wrinkles or dents  
from handling, and  
that the media is not  
contaminated with  
visible fingerprints or  
other foreign  
substances.  
Make sure that the  
media type and size  
for the tray are set  
correctly in the  
control panel for the  
media that you are  
using.  
Calibrate the printer.  
Print the Print Quality  
Troubleshooting  
Pages (see Print  
follow the diagnostic  
procedure listed on  
the first page to help  
isolate the defect to  
a particular  
component.  
ENWW  
Print quality troubleshooting 235  
Media damage  
(wrinkles, curl, creases,  
tears)  
Specks or stray toner  
Make sure that the  
operation and  
location  
Make sure that the  
operation and  
location  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
Make sure to use  
supported media.  
Make sure to use  
supported media.  
Make sure that the  
media type and size  
for the tray are set  
correctly in the  
control panel for the  
media that you are  
using.  
Make sure that the  
media is loaded  
correctly.  
Make sure that the  
media type and size  
for the tray are set  
correctly in the  
control panel for the  
media that you are  
using.  
Calibrate the printer.  
Print the Print Quality  
Troubleshooting  
Pages (see Print  
Make sure that the  
media you are using  
does not have any  
wrinkles or dents  
from handling, and  
that the media is not  
contaminated with  
visible fingerprints or  
other foreign  
follow the diagnostic  
procedure listed on  
the first page to help  
isolate the defect to  
a particular  
component.  
substances.  
Make sure that the  
following supplies  
are seated correctly:  
fuser  
transfer belt  
Inspect the jam  
areas and remove  
any undetected  
jammed or torn  
media.  
236 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Skewed, stretched, or  
off-center page  
Make sure that the  
operation and  
location  
requirements of the  
printer are met.  
Make sure to use  
supported media.  
Make sure that the  
media is loaded  
correctly.  
For problems with  
page skew, turn over  
the stack of media  
and rotate the stack  
180 degrees.  
Make sure that the  
following supplies  
are seated correctly:  
fuser  
transfer belt  
Inspect the jam  
areas and remove  
any undetected  
jammed or torn  
media.  
ENWW  
Print quality troubleshooting 237  
238 Chapter 8 Problemsolving  
ENWW  
Working with memory and  
print server cards  
Printer memory and fonts  
The printer has two 200-pin DDR SDRAM slots. One slot is available for adding memory to  
the printer. DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128 and 256 MB modules.  
Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet 5550 series printers use 200-pin small outline dual  
inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM.  
Note  
Note  
The printer also has three flash memory card slots for printer firmware, fonts, and other  
solutions.  
The first flash memory card is reserved for printer firmware.  
Use the first flash memory card slot for firmware only. The slot is marked "Firmware Slot"  
The two additional flash memory card slots enable the user to add fonts and third-party  
solutions, such as signatures and personalities. The slots are marked "Slot 2" and  
go/gsc.  
Flash memory cards adhere to Compact Flash specifications and size.  
Note  
Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the  
printer. The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you  
install a camera-type flash memory card, the control panel displays a message asking if you  
want to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the  
card will be lost.  
CAUTION  
You may want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PS  
documents, or use many downloaded fonts. Additional memory also allows the printer to  
print multiple, collated copies at the maximum speed.  
Single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) / dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) used on  
previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer.  
Note  
Note  
To order DDR SDRAM, see Supplies and accessories.  
Before ordering additional memory, see how much is currently installed by printing a  
configuration page.  
Printing a configuration page  
1. Press MENU to enter the MENUS.  
ENWW  
Printer memory and fonts 239  
       
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.  
3. Press to select INFORMATION.  
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.  
5. Press to print the configuration page.  
240 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards  
ENWW  
Installing memory and fonts  
You can install more memory for the printer, and you can also install a font card to allow the  
printer to print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet.  
Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist  
strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare  
metal on the printer.  
CAUTION  
To install DDR memory DIMMs  
1. Turn the printer off.  
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.  
3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.  
ENWW  
Installing memory and fonts 241  
     
4. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the eight screws holding the board in place, and  
set them aside.  
5. Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.  
6. To replace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side  
of the DIMM slot, lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.  
7. Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the  
bottom edge of the DIMM.  
242 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards  
ENWW  
8. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM  
slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When  
installed correctly, the metal contacts are not visible.  
9. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.  
If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom of the DIMM is  
aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure you are using the  
correct type of DIMM.  
Note  
ENWW  
Installing memory and fonts 243  
10. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide  
the board back into the printer. Replace and tighten the eight screws removed in step 4.  
11. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.  
12. If you installed a memory DIMM, go to Enabling memory.  
To install a flash memory card  
Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the  
printer. The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you  
install a camera-type flash memory card, the control panel displays a message asking if you  
want to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the  
card will be lost.  
CAUTION  
1. Turn the printer off.  
244 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards  
ENWW  
   
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.  
3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.  
4. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the eight screws holding the board in place, and  
set them aside.  
ENWW  
Installing memory and fonts 245  
5. Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.  
6. Align the groove on the side of the flash memory card with the notches in the connector  
and push it in the slot until it is fully seated.  
Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle.  
CAUTION  
Note  
The first flash memory slot marked "Firmware Slot" is reserved for firmware only. Slots 2 and  
3 should be used for all other solutions.  
7. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide  
the board back into the printer. Replace and tighten the eight screws removed in step 4.  
246 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards  
ENWW  
8. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.  
Enabling memory  
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory.  
To enable memory for Windows 98, ME, and NT  
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers.  
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.  
3. On the Configure tab, click More.  
4. In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.  
5. Click OK.  
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP  
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers or Printers and Faxes.  
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.  
3. On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section).  
4. Select the total amount of memory that is now installed.  
5. Click OK.  
ENWW  
Installing memory and fonts 247  
   
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card  
You can install an HP Jetdirect print server card in the base model printer, which comes with  
an open EIO slot.  
To install an HP Jetdirect print server card  
1. Turn the printer off.  
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.  
3. Locate an empty EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the  
cover for the EIO slot onto the printer, and then remove the cover. You will not need  
these screws and cover again.  
248 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards  
ENWW  
     
4. Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot. Insert and tighten the  
retaining screws that came with the print server card.  
5. Connect the network cable.  
6. Reconnect the power cable, and turn the printer on.  
7. Print a configuration page (see Configuration page). In addition to a printer configuration  
page and a Supplies Status page, an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains  
network configuration and status information should also print.  
If it does not print, uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is  
completely seated in the slot.  
ENWW  
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card 249  
8. Perform one of these steps:  
Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for  
instructions.  
Reinstall the software, choosing the network installation this time.  
250 Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards  
ENWW  
Supplies and accessories  
To order supplies in the US, contact http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. To order supplies  
worldwide, see http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To order accessories, see  
Spare parts and supplies availability  
Spare parts and supplies for this product will be available for at least five years after  
production has stopped.  
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers  
with network connections)  
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server  
1. In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address for the printer. The printer  
status window appears. Or, go to the URL provided in the alert email.  
2. Click Other Links.  
3. Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to a page in which you can choose to send  
information about the printer to HP. You also have the option to order supplies without  
sending the printer’s information to HP.  
4. Select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen.  
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers with network  
connections) 251  
ENWW  
         
Ordering directly through the printer software (for printers  
directly connected to a computer)  
The printer software gives you the ability to order supplies directly from the computer. Three  
conditions are necessary to use this feature:  
The “Printer Status and Alerts” software must be installed on your computer (use the  
custom installation option to install this software).  
The printer must be directly connected to your computer through a parallel cable. For  
more information, see Parallel configuration.  
You must have access to the World Wide Web.  
To order printing supplies directly through the computer  
software  
1. At the bottom right of the screen (in the system tray), select the Printer icon. This opens  
the status window.  
2. On the left side of the status window, select the appropriate Printer icon.  
3. If available at the top of the status window, select Supplies. Otherwise, you can also  
scroll down to Supplies Status.  
4. Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to the supplies purchasing page.  
5. Select the supplies you wish to order.  
Supplies, accessories, and part numbers  
Part  
Part number  
J6073A  
Type/size  
Memory  
Printer hard disk  
Q2630A  
Synchronous 128 MB DIMM  
(SDRAM)  
Q2631A  
Synchronous 256 MB DIMM  
(SDRAM)  
Accessories  
J7934A  
C9669B  
C7130B  
EIO Jetdirect  
Printer stand  
Optional 500-sheet paper  
feeder (Trays 3, 4, and 5)  
Printer supplies  
C9730A  
C9731A  
C9732A  
C9733A  
C9734B  
Q3984A  
Black print cartridge  
Cyan print cartridge  
Yellow print cartridge  
Magenta print cartridge  
Image transfer kit  
Image fuser kit (110 volt)  
252 Appendix B Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
   
Supplies, accessories, and part numbers (continued)  
Part  
Part number  
Type/size  
Q3985A  
Image fuser kit (220 volt)  
Cables  
C2946A  
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel  
cable, 3 m (approximately 10  
feet) long, with 25-pin male/  
micro 36-pin male (“C” size)  
connector  
Paper  
C2934A  
C2936A  
HP Color LaserJet  
Transparencies (letter)  
50 sheets  
HP Color LaserJet  
Transparencies (A4)  
50 sheets  
92296T  
92296U  
C4179A  
HP LaserJet Monochrome  
transparencies (letter)  
HP LaserJet Monochrome  
transparencies (A4)  
HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper  
(letter)  
200 sheets  
C4179B  
Q1298A  
HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper  
(A4)  
200 sheets  
HP LaserJet Tough paper  
(letter)  
Q1298B  
HP LaserJet Tough paper (A4)  
HPU1132  
HP Premium Choice LaserJet  
paper (letter)  
CHP410  
HP Premium Choice LaserJet  
paper (A4)  
HPJ1124  
CHP310  
HP LaserJet paper (letter)  
HP LaserJet paper (A4)  
Reference materials  
5963-7863  
HP LaserJet Printer Family  
Print Media Guide  
5021-0337  
PCL/PJL Technical Reference  
Package  
For downloadable versions, go  
clj5550. When connected,  
select Manuals.  
Ordering directly through the printer software (for printers directly connected to a  
computer) 253  
ENWW  
254 Appendix B Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
Service and Support  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
HP PRODUCT  
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY  
One-year limited warranty  
HP Color LaserJet 5550, HP Color LaserJet 5550n,  
HP Color LaserJet 5550dn, HP Color LaserJet  
5550dtn, and HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn printer  
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in  
materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of  
such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be  
defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.  
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of  
purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and  
used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not  
execute its programming instructions due to such defects.  
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a  
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of  
the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.  
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to  
incidental use.  
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b)  
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation  
outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or  
maintenance.  
HP’s limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product  
and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local  
standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it  
was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW,  
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER  
WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of  
an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific  
legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or  
province to province.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE  
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS  
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL  
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR  
OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or  
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.  
ENWW  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 255  
       
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY  
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY  
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
256 Appendix C Service and Support  
ENWW  
Limited warranty for print cartridges and image drums  
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.  
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished,  
remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from  
misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications  
for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.  
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written  
description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s  
option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase  
price.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANT Y IS EXCLUSIVE  
AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS  
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS  
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL  
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN  
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT  
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN  
ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF  
THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
ENWW  
Limited warranty for print cartridges and image drums 257  
   
HP’s Premium Protection Warranty. Color LaserJet Image Fuser  
Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement  
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the  
printer provides a low-life indicator on the control panel.  
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or  
tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage,  
or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or  
(c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.  
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written  
description of the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either  
replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE  
AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS  
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS  
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL  
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN  
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT  
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN  
ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF  
THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
258 Appendix C Service and Support  
ENWW  
   
HP maintenance agreements  
HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs.  
Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services may vary  
by area. Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you.  
On-site service agreements  
To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs, HP has on-site service  
agreements with three response times:  
Priority on-site service  
This agreement provides 4-hour service response to your site for calls made during normal  
HP business hours.  
Next-day on-site service  
This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request.  
Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP designated service zones are  
available on most on-site agreements (for additional charges).  
Weekly (volume) on-site service  
This agreement provides scheduled weekly on-site visits for organizations with many  
HP products. This agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products,  
including printers, plotters, computers, and disk drives.  
ENWW  
HP maintenance agreements 259  
     
260 Appendix C Service and Support  
ENWW  
Printer specifications  
Physical dimensions  
Product  
Height  
Depth  
Width  
Weight  
HP Color  
LaserJet 5550  
640 mm  
(25.2 in)  
704 mm  
(27.7 in)  
577 mm  
(22.7 in)  
60 kg  
(132 lbs)  
HP Color  
833 mm  
(32.8 in)  
718 mm  
(28.25 in)  
630 mm  
(24.8 in)  
111 kg  
(246 lbs)  
LaserJet 5550n  
and HP Color  
LaserJet 5550dn,  
with optional  
Tray 3 and stand  
HP Color  
LaserJet 5550dtn (38 in)  
with optional  
965 mm  
718 mm  
(28.25 in)  
630 mm  
(24.8 in)  
126 kg  
(279 lbs)  
Trays 2 and 3  
and stand  
HP Color  
LaserJet  
1097 mm  
(43.2 in)  
718 mm  
(28.25 in)  
630 mm  
(24.8 in)  
141 kg  
(312 lbs)  
5550hdn with  
optional Trays 3,  
4, and 5 and stand  
ENWW  
261  
 
Electrical specifications  
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not  
convert operating voltages. This may damage the printer and void the product warranty.  
WARNING!  
110-Volt Models  
230-Volt Models  
Power Requirements  
110-127V (+/- 10%)  
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)  
220-240V (+/- 10%)  
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)  
Rated short term current  
7.0 Amps  
3.0 Amps  
Power Consumption (average, in watts)1  
Printing (28 PPM)2 Ready4  
Product Model  
PowerSave  
(Sleep 2)3  
Off  
HP Color  
LaserJet 5550  
611 W  
614 W  
630 W  
630 W  
632 W  
93 W  
93 W  
93 W  
93 W  
93 W  
23 W  
24 W  
24 W  
24 W  
28 W  
0.3 W  
0.3 W  
0.3 W  
0.3 W  
0.3 W  
HP Color  
LaserJet 5550n  
HP Color  
LaserJet 5550dn  
HP Color  
LaserJet 5550dtn  
HP Color  
LaserJet 5550hdn  
1 Values current as of February 2, 2004. Values subject to change, see http://www.hp.com/  
support/clj5550 for current information.  
2 Power reported is the highest value measured for color and monochrome printing using all  
standard voltages.  
3 Default time from Ready Mode to Sleep 2 = 30 minutes.  
4 Heat dissipation in Ready Mode = 318 BTU/Hour.  
Operating environment specifications  
Environment  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Allowed  
15 to 27°C (59 to 81°F)  
10 to 70% RH  
These values are subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/clj5550 for current  
information.  
Note  
262 Appendix D Printer specifications  
ENWW  
   
Acoustic emissions1, 2  
Sound Power Level  
Declared Per ISO 9296  
Printing (28 PPM)  
Ready  
LWAd=6.6 Bels (A) [66 dB (A)]  
LWAd=4.9 Bels (A) [49 dB (A)]  
Sound Pressure Level - Bystander Position  
Declared Per ISO 9296  
Printing (28 PPM)  
Ready  
LpAm=49dB (A)  
LpAm=33 dB (A)  
1 Values current as of January 25, 2004. Values subject to change, see http://www.hp.com/  
support/clj5550 for current information.  
2 Configuration tested: Base unit printing A4 monochrome from standard tray.  
ENWW  
Acoustic emissions1, 2 263  
   
Environmental specifications  
Specification  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Allowed  
15 to 27°C (59 to 81°F)  
10 to 70 percent RH  
264 Appendix D Printer specifications  
ENWW  
   
Regulatory information  
FCC regulations  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
increase separation between equipment and receiver.  
connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
located.  
consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.  
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void  
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.  
Note  
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of  
FCC rules.  
ENWW  
FCC regulations 265  
     
Environmental product stewardship program  
Protecting the environment  
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally  
sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts  
on the environment.  
Ozone production  
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).  
Energy consumption  
Energy usage drops significantly while in PowerSave mode, which saves natural resources  
and saves money without affecting the high performance of this printer. This product  
qualifies for ENERGY STAR®, which is a voluntary program to encourage the development  
of energy-efficient office products.  
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection  
Agency. As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that  
this product meets ENERGY STAR® Guidelines (version 3.0) for energy efficiency. For  
more information, see http://www.energystar.gov/.  
Paper use  
This product’s optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) can reduce paper  
usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.  
Plastics  
Plastic parts over 25 grams have markings according to international standards that  
enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.  
HP LaserJet Printing Supplies  
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing cartridges can be returned to HP through  
the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy to use and free takeback  
program is available in over 48 countries/regions. Multi-lingual program information and  
instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package.  
266 Appendix E Regulatory information  
ENWW  
                 
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program  
Information  
Since 1990, the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has collected more  
than 47 million used LaserJet printer cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in  
the world’s landfills. The HP LaserJet printer cartridges and supplies are collected and bulk-  
shipped to our resource and recovery partners, who disassemble the cartridges. After a  
thorough quality inspection, selected parts are reclaimed for use in new cartridges.  
Remaining materials are separated and converted into raw materials for use by other  
industries to make a variety of useful products.  
U.S. returns—For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and  
supplies, HP encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges  
together and use the single, pre-paid, and pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in  
the package. For more information in the U.S., call 1-800-340-2445 or visit the  
HP LaserJet Supplies website at http://www.hp.com/recycle.  
Non-U.S. recycling returns—Non-U.S. customers should call the local HP Sales and  
Service Office or visit the http://www.hp.com/recycle website for further information  
regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.  
Recycled paper  
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines  
outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the  
use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002.  
Material restrictions  
This product does not contain batteries.  
This product does not contain added mercury.  
For recycling information, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle, contact your local authorities, or  
go to the Electronics Industries Alliance website http://www.eiae.org.  
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)  
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) can be obtained by contacting http://www.hp.com/go/  
msds.  
For more information  
On HP environmental programs, including:  
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products  
HP’s commitment to the environment  
HP’s environmental management system  
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program  
Material Safety Data Sheets  
ENWW  
Environmental product stewardship program 267  
         
Declaration of Conformity  
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014  
Manufacturer’s Name:  
Manufacturer’s Address:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
11311 Chinden Boulevard  
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA  
declares that the product  
Product Name:  
Regulatory Model Number:4)  
HP Color LaserJet 5550/5550n/5550dn/5550dtn/5550hdn  
BOISB-0310-00  
Including  
Q3956A -- Optional 500-Sheet Input Tray  
Q9669A -- Optional Printer Stand  
All  
Product Options:  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
Safety:  
IEC 60950:1999 / EN60950: 2000  
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A11:1996 +A2:2001  
(Class 1 Laser/LED Product)  
GB4943-2001  
CISPR 22:1997 / EN 55022:1998 Class B1)3)  
EN 61000-3-2:1995 / A14  
EMC:  
EN 61000-3-3:1995 / A1  
EN 55024:1998  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2), ICES-003, Issue 3  
AS / NZS 3548:1995 + A1 + A2, GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-1998, CNS13438  
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries  
the CE-Marking accordingly  
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems Compliance testing of product to  
standard with exception of Clause 9.5, which is not yet in effect.  
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
3) The product includes LAN (Local Area Network) options. When the interface cable is attached to LAN connectors, the product meets the  
requirements of EN55022 and CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic  
environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures”.  
4) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name  
or the product number(s).  
Boise, Idaho 83713, USA  
5 December 2003  
For regulatory topics only:  
Australia Contact  
European Contact  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia, Ltd. 31-41 Joseph Street Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia  
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE / Standards  
Europe Herrenberger Straße 140 Böblingen, D-71034, Germany (+49-7031-14-3143)  
USA Contact  
Product Relations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160 Boise, ID 83707-0015, USA  
(208-396-6000)  
268 Appendix E Regulatory information  
ENWW  
   
Safety statements  
Laser safety  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug  
Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1,  
1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is  
certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human  
Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for  
Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely  
confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape  
during any phase of normal user operation.  
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in  
this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.  
WARNING!  
Canadian DOC regulations  
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.  
«Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques.  
«CEM».»  
EMI statement (Korea)  
VCCI statement (Japan)  
ENWW  
Safety statements 269  
               
Laser Statement for Finland  
Luokan 1 laserlaite  
Klass 1 Laser Apparat  
HP Color LaserJet 5550, HP Color LaserJet 5550n, HP Color LaserJet 5550dn, HP Color  
LaserJet 5550dtn, HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen  
luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen  
pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN  
60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.  
VAROITUS !  
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän  
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.  
VARNING !  
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren  
utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.  
HUOLTO  
HP Color LaserJet 5550, HP Color LaserJet 5550n, HP Color LaserJet 5550dn, HP Color  
LaserJet 5550dtn, HP Color LaserJet 5550hdn -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän  
huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen  
koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista,  
paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi  
tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.  
VARO !  
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen  
ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.  
VARNING !  
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för  
osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin  
säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.  
270 Appendix E Regulatory information  
ENWW  
   
Glossary  
bidirectional communication  
Two-way data transmission.  
bin  
A receptacle for holding printed pages.  
BOOTP  
Abbreviation for “Bootstrap Protocol,” an Internet protocol that allows a  
computer to find its own IP address.  
chooser  
A Macintosh accessory that allows you to select a device.  
control panel  
The area on the printer that contains buttons and a display screen. Use the  
control panel to set printer settings and to get information about the printer  
status.  
default  
DHCP  
The normal or standard setting for hardware or software.  
Abbreviation for “dynamic host configuration protocol.” DHCP enables  
individual computers or peripherals connected to a network to find their own  
configuration information, including the IP address.  
DIMM  
Abbreviation for “dual in-line memory module.” A small circuit board that  
holds memory chips.  
duplex  
EIO  
A feature that allows printing on both sides of a sheet of paper.  
Abbreviation for “Enhanced Input/Output.” A hardware interface used for  
adding an internal print server, network adaptor, hard disk, and other plug-in  
functionality for HP printers.  
Emulated PostScript  
Software that emulates Adobe PostScript, a programming language that  
describes the appearance of the printed page.  
EPS  
FIR  
Abbreviation for “Encapsulated PostScript”: a type of graphics file.  
Abbreviation for “Fast InfraRed.” InfraRed wireless printing.  
ENWW  
Glossary 271  
 
firmware  
Programming instructions that are stored in a read-only memory unit inside  
the printer.  
font  
A complete set of letters, numerals, and symbols in a typeface.  
The assembly that uses heat to fuse the toner onto the paper or other media.  
Various shades of gray.  
fuser  
grayscale  
halftone pattern  
A halftone pattern uses differing sizes of ink dots to produce a continuous-  
tone image such as a photograph.  
HP Jetdirect  
HP product for network printing.  
HP Web Jetadmin  
HP trademarked Web-based printer control software that lets you use a  
computer to manage any peripheral connected to an HP Jetdirect print server.  
I/O  
Abbreviation for “input/output” and refers to computer port settings.  
The unique number assigned to a computer device connected to a network.  
Abbreviation for “internetwork packet exchange/sequenced packet exchange.”  
IP address  
IPX/SPX  
macro  
A single keystroke or command that results in a series of actions or  
instructions.  
media  
The paper, labels, transparencies, or other material on which the printer  
prints the image.  
memory tag  
monochrome  
mopy  
A memory partition with a specific address.  
Black and white. Devoid of color.  
The HP term for “multiple original prints” capability.  
A person who manages a network.  
network administrator  
network  
A system of computers interconnected by telephone wires or other means in  
order to share information.  
272 Glossary  
ENWW  
page buffer  
Temporary printer memory used to hold page data while the printer creates  
an image of the page.  
parallel cable  
A type of computer cable often used to connect printers directly to a  
computer rather than to a network.  
parallel port  
PCL  
A connection point for a device connected with a parallel cable.  
Abbreviation for “Printer Control Language.”  
peripheral  
An auxilliary device, such as a printer, modem, or storage system, that works  
in conjunction with a computer.  
personality  
pixel  
Distinctive features or characteristics of a printer or printer language.  
Abbreviation for “picture element,” which is the smallest unit of area in an  
image displayed on a screen.  
PJL  
Abbreviation for “Printer Job Language.”  
PostScript  
PPD  
A trademarked page description language.  
Abbreviation for “PostScript Printer Description.”  
Software program that allows a computer to access printer features.  
printer driver  
RAM  
Abbreviation for “random access memory,” a type of computer memory used  
to store data that may change.  
RARP  
Abbreviation for “Reverse Address Resolution Protocol,” a protocol that  
enables a computer or peripheral to determine its own IP address.  
raster image  
render  
An image composed of dots.  
The process of outputting text or graphics.  
RJ-45  
A type of connector used for data transmission over standard telephone wire.  
ROM  
Abbreviation for “read-only memory,” a type of computer memory used to  
store data that should not be changed.  
ENWW  
Glossary 273  
supplies  
TCP/IP  
Materials used by the printer that are used up and must be replaced. Supply  
items for the HP Color LaserJet 5550 printer are the four print cartridges, the  
transfer unit, and the fuser.  
An internet protocol (developed by the U.S. Department of Defense) that has  
become the global standard for communications.  
toner  
The fine black or colored powder that forms the image on the printed media.  
transfer unit  
The black plastic belt that transports the paper inside the printer and  
transfers the toner from the print cartridges onto the paper.  
tray  
A receptacle for holding blank paper.  
xerographic paper  
General term for paper intended for photocopy or laser printer use.  
274 Glossary  
ENWW  
Index  
Symbols/Numerics  
2-sided printing  
printer personalities 56  
problems 224  
binding options 101  
blank pages 101  
using in shared environments 60  
controlling print jobs 76  
control panel settings 100  
D
A
Declaration of Conformity 268  
diagnostics menu 50  
DIMMs (dual inline memory modules)  
installing 241  
accessories  
ordering 251  
auto continue 57  
double-sided printing 99  
driver autoconfiguration 13  
duplex printing 99  
auxiliary connection configuration 71  
B
booklet printing 102  
E
e-mail alerts  
C
configuring 141  
EIO (Enhanced Input Output)  
configuring 72  
embedded Web server  
checking toner level 134  
description 24  
ordering supplies 251  
using 116  
clearable warnings  
setting display time 57  
color  
adjusting 126  
halftone options 126  
HP ImageREt 3600 124  
managing 126  
matching 128  
print in grayscale 126  
printed vs. monitor 128  
sRGB 125  
using to configure alerts 141  
envelopes  
jams 219  
using 124  
color options  
loading in Tray 1 84  
errors  
auto continue 57  
configuring 53  
color supply out  
reporting 58  
F
FCC regulations 265  
file directory page  
printing 114  
flash memory card  
installing 244  
font list  
components  
locating 12  
configuration page  
printing 112  
configuring  
e-mail alerts 141  
control panel  
printing 115  
blank display 221  
buttons 32, 34  
configuring 52  
display 32  
G
grayscale printing 126  
H
lights 32, 35  
HP fraud hotline 132  
menus 36, 37  
messages 155  
overview 31  
ENWW  
Index 275  
 
HP Jetdirect print servers  
installing 248  
HP toolbox  
memory  
enabling 247  
menu map  
using 119  
hp toolbox 25  
description 42  
printing 112  
menus  
HP Web Jetadmin  
checking toner level 135  
using to configure e-mail alerts 141  
diagnostics 50  
I/O 48  
I
information 42  
paper handling 43  
print quality 45  
printing 44  
resets 49  
retrieve job 41  
system setup 46  
I/O menu 48  
images  
printing 96  
information menu 42  
input trays  
configuring 43, 54, 80  
IP address  
displaying 53  
N
networks  
administrative tools 26  
J
jam recovery  
AppleTalk 73  
setting 59  
configuring 62  
jams  
disabling DLC/LLC 66  
disabling IPX/SPX 66  
disabling protocols 66  
I/O interfaces 72  
idle timeout 67  
common causes 183  
configuring e-mail alerts 141  
envelopes 219  
locations 181  
recovery 181  
IP address 63  
Japanese VCCI statement 269  
job held timeout 52  
job storage limit 52  
link speed 67  
local and default gateway 65  
Novell NetWare 72  
Novell NetWare frame type 62  
software 23  
K
subnet mask 64  
Korean EMI statement 269  
syslog server 64  
TCP/IP parameters 63  
UNIX/Linux 73  
L
language  
changing 59  
lights 35  
Windows 73  
P
M
paper handling menu 43  
paper path test page  
printing 152  
parallel configuration 69  
personality  
maintenance  
agreements 259  
media  
colored paper 96  
envelopes 96  
glossy paper 95  
heavy paper 97  
HP LaserJet Tough paper 98  
labels 97  
letterhead 98  
preprinted forms 98  
recycled paper 98  
selecting 78  
setting 56  
PIN (personal identification number)  
private jobs 108  
PowerSave  
changing settings 55  
disabling 56  
time 55  
preconfiguration 13  
print cartridge  
transparencies 95  
authentication 132  
checking the toner level 134  
genuine HP 132  
276 Index  
ENWW  
life expectancy 133  
managing 132  
non-HP 132  
stopping a print request 105  
storing jobs  
deleting 107  
replacing 135  
storing 133  
print quality menu 45  
print server card  
installing 248  
printing 107  
private jobs 108  
proof and hold jobs 107  
quick copy jobs 106  
storing 106  
printer  
subnet mask 64  
supplies  
connectivity 11  
driver 14  
ordering 251  
printer information pages  
troubleshooting 152  
printer personalities 56  
printing  
replacement intervals 133  
supplies low  
configuring e-mail alerts 141  
reporting 58  
booklets 102  
supplies out  
printing menu 44  
private jobs  
configuring alerts 141  
supplies status page  
description 42  
deleting 109  
printing 108  
printing 113  
product stewardship 266  
system setup menu 46  
R
T
RAM (random access memory) 10  
recycling  
troubleshooting  
checklist 151  
print cartridge 266  
registration page  
printing 152  
color printing problems 225  
control panel problems 224  
duplexing 219  
regulations  
incorrect printer output 227  
jams 181  
FCC 265  
resets menu 49  
retrieve job menu 41  
media handling problems 215  
overhead transparencies 230  
print quality 230  
S
printer response 221  
software applications 229  
transparencies 218  
two-sided printing 99  
safety statements  
laser safety 269  
laser safety for Finland 270  
service  
agreements 259  
software  
U
Update Now 13  
usage page  
description 42  
printing 113  
USB configuration 70  
applications 25  
installing 18, 23  
macintosh 17  
networks 23  
utilities 24  
special situations  
blank back cover 104  
custom-sized paper 104  
different first page 104  
specifications  
W
warranty  
print cartridge 257  
product 255  
transfer unit 258  
wireless printing  
802.11b standard 74  
Bluetooth 74  
acoustic 263  
electrical 262  
humidity 264  
temperature 264  
ENWW  
Index 277  
278 Index  
ENWW  
© 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.  
*Q3713-90913*  
*Q3713-90913*  
www.hp.com  
Q3713-90913  

Sanyo Spw Umr224exh56 User Manual
Raritan Computer 23 422 User Manual
Precisionaire Rings Panels Filter St55r 2020 User Manual
Philips Silver 357 User Manual
Omega Lift Magic Lift 29025 User Manual
HITACHI 57XWX20B User Manual
DBTECHNOLOGIES VIOX15 User Manual
BLACK DECKER HEDGE HOG HS2400 User Manual
BLACK DECKER DVJ215J User Manual
Aavix 87cc Snowblower User Manual